HYperion - Interactive Designer Guide PDF
HYperion - Interactive Designer Guide PDF
HYperion - Interactive Designer Guide PDF
INTERACTIVE REPORTING
RELEASE 9.2
USERS GUIDE
Copyright 1989-2006 Hyperion Solutions Corporation. All rights reserved. Hyperion, the Hyperion logo, and Hyperions product names are trademarks of Hyperion. References to other companies and their products use trademarks owned by the respective companies and are for reference purpose only. No portion hereof may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose other than the recipients personal use, without the express written permission of Hyperion. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Hyperion shall not be liable for errors contained herein or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use hereof. Any Hyperion software described herein is licensed exclusively subject to the conditions set forth in the Hyperion license agreement. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the applicable Hyperion license agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (Oct 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14, as applicable. Hyperion Solutions Corporation 5450 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, California 95054 Printed in the U.S.A.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Where to Find Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Help Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Additional Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Education Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consulting Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii xvii xvii xviii
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii CHAPTER 1 Introducing Interactive Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Interactive Reporting Studio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 How Interactive Reporting Studio Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Relational Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Multidimensional Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 About Interactive Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Data Source Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Data Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Analysis and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Turning Data into Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 CHAPTER 2 Interactive Reporting Studio: A Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Starting the Interactive Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Opening and Saving a Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Looking at a Simple Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Viewing Database Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Adding Topics to a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Contents
iii
Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pivoting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Totals and Subtotals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32 32 32 33 33 34 35 35 36 36
Charting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Sorting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Inserting Text Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Designing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Smart Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 39 39 39
CHAPTER 3 Interactive Reporting Studio Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Using the Interactive Reporting Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintaining Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting to Microsoft Office HTML File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formula Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Document as a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quitting an Interactive Reporting Studio Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quitting the Interactive Reporting Web Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 48 50 56 62 67 69 72 73 73 74 75
iv
Contents
Using Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Changing Workspace Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Inserting Sections and Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Formatting Text and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Formatting Numeric Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Changing Numeric Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Displaying Numbers in Scientific Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 =Working with Document Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Understanding Document Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Adding Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Viewing Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Moving Between Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Duplicating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Renaming Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Adding Headers and Footers to Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Deleting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Specifying Default Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Selecting Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Document Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Customizing Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Tools Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Interactive Reporting Web Client Co-existence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Locally Saved BQYs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Interactive Reporting Web Client Mismatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 CHAPTER 4 Querying Relational Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Query Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Using Data Models in the Query Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Building Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Working with Items on the Request Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Processing Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Query Processing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Saving Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Cancelling Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Building Subqueries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Regular Subqueries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Correlated Subqueries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Derived Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Derived Tables Rules and Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Derived Tables and SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Working with Query Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Contents
Processing Results to a Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimating Query Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Database Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preaggregating Data Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appending Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Local Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Stored Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Query Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Data Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111 112 113 113 116 117 118 119 120 120
Query Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 CHAPTER 5 Working with Query Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Results Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Understanding Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Enhancing Your Results Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Results Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Computed Items to Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Data Functions to Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grouping Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Grouped Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Columns Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breaking Out Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with the Results Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Columns and Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 125 125 125 126 127 128 128 128 129 129 129 129
Saving Results Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Exporting Result Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Results Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 CHAPTER 6 Working with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Table Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Creating Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Tables as a Data Staging Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Manipulating Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Data in a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grouping Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Grouping Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Date Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Data Functions to Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 135 136 137 137 139 139 139
Selecting Columns and Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Deleting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Table Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 CHAPTER 7 Querying Multidimensional Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 OLAPQuery Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Defining OLAPQuery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 General OLAPQuery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Database-specific OLAPQuery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Building OLAP Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 OLAPQuery Section Data Layout Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 OLAPQuery Member and Level Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Refining OLAPQuery Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Specifying a Slicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Drilling Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Drilling Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Hybrid Analysis and Drilling (Analytic Services and DB2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Using OLAPQuery Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Processing OLAP Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Processing OLAP Queries Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Working with an OLAPQuery Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Creating a OLAPResults Section Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Applying Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Applying Member Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Applying Measure Filters (Analytic Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Applying Variable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Changing Data Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Suppressing Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Adding Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Adding Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Showing OLAP Results as a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Formatting OLAPQuery Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Drilling Through from a Multi-Dimensional Database to a Relational Database . . . . . . . . . 166 Setting Drill-through Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Drilling Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 OLAP Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 CHAPTER 8 Analyzing Data with Pivot Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Pivot Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Creating a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Pivoting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Charting a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Working with Pivot Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Contents
vii
Selecting Pivot Table Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Pivot Table Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Label Nesting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Pivot Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Data Calculations in Pivot Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Totals and Subtotals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Cumulative Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using True Computed Item Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Surface Values in Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Weighted Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pivot Section Aggregation and Surface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fact Detail Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pivot Fact Detail Cell Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pivot Section Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computed Item Detail Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174 174 174 175 175 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 183 184 186 192 194
Pivot Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 CHAPTER 9 Charting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Chart Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Charting Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Chart Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Understanding Chart Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Using the Chart Data Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Creating Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Selecting a Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Working with Two-dimensional Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Using Pie Charts to Analyze Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Using Two-dimensional Bar Charts to Analyze Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Working with Multidimensional Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the 3-D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Three-dimensional Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Clustered Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Stacked Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Area Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Ribbon Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Combination Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating Chart Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Different Scales to Compare Related Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Data Functions in Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Chart Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 208 209 209 210 210 211 212 212 213 213 214 215 216
viii
Contents
Creating Pivot Tables from Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Drilling into Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Hiding and Focusing on Charted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Restoring Hidden Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Working with Chart Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Selecting Chart Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Displaying Axis Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Inserting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Changing Chart Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Chart Scrolling and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Scrolling through Chart Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Rotating and Elevating Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Smart Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Initial Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Auto Resizing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Fitting Charts to Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Customizing Chart Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Setting General Chart Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Customizing Chart Patterns and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Customizing Chart Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Chart Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 CHAPTER 10 Report Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Report Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Report Section Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Expression Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Creating a Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Report Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Table Column Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Inserting Additional Tables in a Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Adding Report Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Inserting Report Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Inserting Page Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Inserting Page Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Adding Other Report Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Working with Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Modifying Filter Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Working with a Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Displaying Rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Using Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Using Design Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Setting Up a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Contents
ix
Specifying Page Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Specifying Page Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Setting Up Page Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Enhancing Report Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Report Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Break Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using True Totals for Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding and Focusing on Reported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 254 255 256 256 257 258
Using Multiple Data Sources in a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Creating Smart Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Formatting Report Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Converting Detail Reports from Versions Earlier than 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of Detail Report Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of Smart Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of Graphic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 262 263 263 263 263 264
Report Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 CHAPTER 11 Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 About Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server versus Local Filter Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Simple Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Results Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 268 269 270 273 274 275 275 275
Setting Compound Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Setting Variable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Customizing Filters Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Filtering Data in a Table Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Multiple Filters and the Meta Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 The Two-Tier Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Filtering Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 CHAPTER 12 Working with Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 About Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Computing New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Computed Items in Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
x
Contents
Computed Items and Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Pivot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Scalar Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Teradata Version 3 OLAP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Functions for Returning the Day of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Common Computed Item Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Math Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Central Tendency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Calculated Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Percentile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Rank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Project Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Scalar Function Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Avg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 AvgNonNull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ColMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ColMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 CountDistinct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 CountNull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 CountNonNull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Cume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Percentile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Rank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 RankAsc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 StdDev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 StdDevp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Var . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Varp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Trend Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 General Moving Average and Moving Function Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Simple Moving Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Positioning of Moving Average Results - Trailing and Centered Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Weighted Moving Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Exponential Moving Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Moving Diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Moving Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Moving Median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Contents
xi
Moving Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Moving Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Direction Of Moving Function Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 CHAPTER 13 Applying Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Sorting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Simple Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Sort Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Complex Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Complex Sorting in the Query, Results, and Table Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Complex Sorting in Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
xii
Contents
Preface
Welcome to the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting Users Guide. This preface discusses the following topics:
Purpose on page xiv Audience on page xiv Document Structure on page xiv Where to Find Documentation on page xv Help Menu Commands on page xv Conventions on page xvi Additional Support on page xvii
Preface
xiii
Purpose
The Hyperion System 9 BI+ Interactive Reporting Users Guide provides information that you need to use Interactive Reporting Studio. It explains the user interface a features and options and contains the concepts, processes, procedures, formats, tasks, and examples that you need to use the software.
Audience
This book is for all levels of Interactive Reporting Studio and Web Client users, from those who need to simply retrieve and view data in a report format, to those who need to build queries and reports as well as analyze data.
Document Structure
This document contains the following information:
Chapter 1, Introducing Interactive Reporting Studio introduces Interactive Reporting software tools and provides an overview of how anyone can use Interactive Reporting to access and analyze database information. Chapter 2, Interactive Reporting Studio: A Tutorialoffers a tutorial on basic data analysis techniques and familiarizes you with the powerful capabilities and features of the Interactive Reporting application. Chapter 3, Interactive Reporting Studio Basics provides an overview of the Interactive Reporting and describes fundamental features and functions. Chapter 4, Querying Relational Databases explains how to use Interactive Reporting to connect to and query a relational database. It provides basic information about data models and the Hyperion System 9 BI +Interactive Reporting Repository, as well as how to build and process queries and subqueries. Chapter 5, Working with Query Results explains how to work with the results sets obtained from your relational database query or data import. It includes how to enhance your results set, as well as how to export your results to different file formats. Chapter 7, Querying Multidimensional Databases explains how to use Interactive Reporting to connect to and query a multidimensional database. It details how to build, refine, and process OLAP queries and how to apply filters. Chapter 6, Working with Tables explains how to use tables to organize your data. Chapter 8, Analyzing Data with Pivot Tables explains how to use pivot tables to quickly summarize or cross-tabulate large amounts of data. Chapter 9, Charting Data explains how to use the Interactive Reporting Studio charting features to perform interactive analysis of your data in a graphic format Chapter 10, Report Designer explains how to use the Report Designer, Interactive Reporting Studio dynamic analytical report writer, to create free-form, presentation-quality reports.
xiv
Preface
Chapter 11, Using Filters explains how to use filters to refine your data and restrict the data you do not need for more intelligent analysis. Chapter 12, Working with Computed Items describes how to use calculations to compute new data items. Such calculations are important for supplementing the information already stored in the database Chapter 13, Applying Sorts discusses features that enable you to sort data in various Interactive Reporting sections, including sort lines, single sorts, and nested sorts. Glossary contains a list of key terms and their definitions. Index contains a list of Interactive Reporting terms and their page references.
The HTML Information Map is available from the Interactive Reporting Help menu for all operating systems; for products installed on Microsoft Windows systems, it is also available from the Start menu. Online help is available from within Interactive Reporting after you log on to the product, you can access online help by clicking the Help button or selecting Help from the menu bar. The Hyperion Download Center can be accessed from the Hyperion Solutions Web site.
2 In the Login ID and Password text boxes, enter your e-mail address and password. 3 In the Language list box, select the appropriate language and click Login. 4 If you are a member on multiple Hyperion Solutions Download Center accounts, select the account that you
want to use for the current session.
5 To access documentation online, from the Product List, select the appropriate product and follow the
on-screen instructions.
xv
Table i
Help Menu Commands Description Launches a help topic specific to the window or Web page. Launches the Interactive Reporting help. Launches the Interactive Reporting Information Map, which provides the following assistance:
Online help in PDF and HTML format Links to related resources to assist you in using Interactive Reporting
Launches the Hyperion Technical Support site, where you submit defects and contact Technical Support. Launches the Hyperion Developer Network site, where you access information about known defects and best practices. This site also provides tools and information to assist you in getting starting using Hyperion products:
Sample models A resource library containing FAQs, tips, and technical white papers Demos and Webcasts demonstrating how Hyperion products are used
Hyperion.com
Launches Hyperions corporate Web site, where you access a variety of information about Hyperion:
Office locations The product suites Consulting and partner programs Customer and education services and technical support
Launches the About Interactive Reporting dialog box, which contains copyright and release information, along with version details.
Conventions
The following table shows the conventions that are used in this document: [
Table ii
Conventions Used in This Document Meaning Arrows indicate the beginning of procedures consisting of sequential steps or one-step procedures. In examples, brackets indicate that the enclosed elements are optional. Bold in procedural steps highlights user interface elements on which the user must perform actions. Capital letters denote commands and various IDs. (Example: CLEARBLOCK command)
Item
xvi
Preface
Table ii
Conventions Used in This Document (Continued) Meaning Keystroke combinations shown with the plus sign (+) indicate that you should press the first key and hold it while you press the next key. Do not type the plus sign. For consecutive keystroke combinations, a comma indicates that you press the combinations consecutively. Courier font indicates that the example text is code or syntax. Courier italic text indicates a variable field in command syntax. Substitute a value in place of the variable shown in Courier italics. When you see the environment variable ARBORPATH in italics, substitute the value of ARBORPATH from your site. Italic n stands for a variable number; italic x can stand for a variable number or a letter. These variables are sometimes found in formulas. Ellipsis points indicate that text has been omitted from an example. This document provides examples and procedures using a right-handed mouse. If you use a left-handed mouse, adjust the procedures accordingly. Options in menus are shown in the following format. Substitute the appropriate option names in the placeholders, as indicated. Menu name > Menu command > Extended menu command For example: 1. Select File > Desktop > Accounts.
Item Ctrl+0
Ctrl+Q, Shift+Q
ARBORPATH
Additional Support
In addition to providing documentation and online help, Hyperion offers the following product information and support. For details on education, consulting, or support options, click the Services link at the Hyperion Solutions Web site.
Education Services
Hyperion offers instructor-led training, custom training, and e-Learning covering all Hyperion applications and technologies. Training is geared to administrators, end users, and information systems professionals.
Consulting Services
Experienced Hyperion consultants and partners implement software solutions tailored to clients particular reporting, analysis, modeling, and planning requirements. Hyperion also offers specialized consulting packages, technical assessments, and integration solutions.
Additional Support
xvii
Technical Support
Hyperion provides enhanced telephone and electronic-based support to clients to resolve product issues quickly and accurately. This support is available for all Hyperion products at no additional cost to clients with current maintenance agreements.
Documentation Feedback
Hyperion strives to provide complete and accurate documentation. Your opinion on the documentation is of value, so please send your comments by going to
http://www.hyperion.com/services/support_programs/doc_survey/index.cfm.
xviii
Preface
Chapter
This sectionshows how anyone both technical and nontechnical peoplecan use Interactive Reporting Studio to access and analyze database information. This chapter introduces the conceptual background of business intelligence software tools and provides an overview of database concepts. It also explains the Interactive Reporting Studio approach to querying databases. Interactive Reporting Studio is an all-in-one query, data analysis, and reporting tools for your Windows or UNIX system.
In This Chapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 How Interactive Reporting Studio Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 About Interactive Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Turning Data into Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
21
Overview
Interactive Reporting Studio connects business users to data and give them a complete set of tools to support business decisions including ad hoc client/server querying, reporting, and analysis all in one application. Interactive Reporting Studio provides the following capabilities:
The Interactive Reporting Studio is an all-in-one query, data analysis, and reporting tool. The interface is highly intuitive and provides an easy-to-navigate environment for data exploration and decision making. With a consistent design paradigm for query, pivot, charting, and reporting, users at any level move fluidly through cascading dashboardsfinding answers fast. Trends and anomalies are automatically highlighted, and robust formatting tools enable users to easily build free-form, presentation-quality reports for broad-scale publishing across their organization.
Support for all industry-standard databases (see Relational Databases on page 23 and Multidimensional Databases on page 23 for a list of the specific databases supported). A point-and-click interface for intuitive custom query and report building. Support for Microsoft Windows and Motif (UNIX), with complete file compatibility between the platforms. Easy, nonprocedural navigation between query and reporting sections. An extensive online help system that provides assistance for features and document construction. A drag-and-drop Data Layout tool for developing reports and analyzing data. Interactive pivot reporting that lets you perform unrestricted drill-down analysis of different data relationships. Extensive formatting tools for creating compelling data presentations. An easy-to-use, interactive charting utility for graphically displaying and drilling-down into data.
22
Relational Databases
A relational database is a collection of data items organized as a set of formally described tables from which data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without having to reorganize the database tables. The definition of a relational database results in a table of metadata or formal descriptions of the tables, columns, domains, and constraints. Metadata is literally data about data.
Multidimensional Databases
A multidimensional database is a data cube that provides multidimensional views of business data. Multidimensional databases are OLAP servers that enable you to easily and selectively extract and view data from different points of view. Multidimensional databases consider each data attribute as a separate dimension and allow you to create hierarchies within a dimension. OLAP (On-Line Analytical Processing) designates a category of applications and technologies that allow the collection, storage, manipulation, and reproduction of multidimensional data, with the goal of analysis. OLAP provides for the fast analysis of multidimensional shared information.
A data model, which is a visual representation of actual database tables A query or multiple queries for retrieving a subset of data from the database
23
Join options, including local joins between different data sets within a single document, local join filters, and optional join path generation A results set displayed in a table-style format Reports presenting customized hierarchical views of your data Multidimensional pivot tables that permit drill-down analysis of data results Charts that graphically display your query results and allow different angles of vision on the data.
All Interactive Reporting documents (.bqys) usually have at least one Query section and one Results section. From the Results section, you can create multiple Pivot, Chart, Table, and Report sections to analyze and present data. Developers can also create Dashboard sections, which provide an automated push-button interface to a document for use by other users across the enterprise.
When a data model is present in the Query workspace, Interactive Reporting Studio automatically prompts you with the correct connection when your actions require a database connection. You need to be connected to a database when you download a data model and when you process your query to retrieve a data set. In addition, you must be connected to show values for a server filter, to use server functions to create a computed item, or to schedule a document. When you open an Interactive Reporting Studio to begin a work session (for example, by downloading a data model from an Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository, or creating a new data model), you must select the correct connection for the targeted database.
Interactive Reporting database connections retain all the information necessary to log onto a specific configuration of database and connection API software. In addition, an Interactive Reporting database connection retains DBMS-specific connection preferences as well as specifications for automatic access to metadata. This simplifies the connection process for company personnel by transparently handling host and configuration information. Each user can substitute his or her own database user name when using the Interactive Reporting database connection, which enforces security measures and privileges that are centralized at the database server.
24
Interactive Reporting database connections have significant advantages in network environments with many database users. One connection can be created for each database connection in the environment and shared with each end-user. Because passwords are not saved with the Interactive Reporting database connection, there is no danger that distribution will provide unauthorized access to any user who receives the wrong Interactive Reporting database connection file or acquires it from other sources.
Data Models
After connecting to a database, Interactive Reporting Studio presents subsets of the database contents in the Query section through custom views called data models, which are visual representations of actual database tables. You use a data model to interact with a database to create queries that specify which data to fetch from the database and retrieve for analysis. Data models make the database more accessible because you can:
Substitute descriptive names for arcane database table and column names. Create custom views of the data. Add computed fields for performing calculations on the retrieved data.
In addition to standard data models derived from database tables, Interactive Reporting Studio lets you create metatopicsvirtual views independent of the actual database. You can use metatopics to standardize complex calculations and simplify views of the underlying data with intuitive topics customized for business needs. Depending on their Interactive Reporting Studio tool, users can create their own data models or use data models provided by other users or through the centralized Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository, a catalogued storehouse of database views for querying. You also optionally can provide a document that contains a master data model from which your users can then build one or more queries. This master data model allows your users to concentrate on the data they want, not how to set up the data access. Any existing data model can be promoted to a master data model. Thus, you can offer users a raw look at the table schema, or you can hide the complexity by first creating one or more metatopics and then promoting the data model. Each time the user adds a new query, the Interactive Reporting Studio asks if the query should be linked to the master data model. Any linked queries inherit changes made to the master data model, but the querys data model is locked and cannot be modified. (Only the master data model can be changed.)
Queries
A query is a request for information from a database. Queries take the form of a command language that lets you select, insert, update, find out the location of data, and so forth. The standard command language for getting information from and updating a relational database is Structured Query Language (SQL). SQL statements are used both for interactive queries for information from a relational database and for gathering data for reports.
25
Multidimensional databases also require a language that allows you to express multidimensional queries; however, to date, there is no standard. MDX (Multidimensional Expression Language) is used by Microsofts OLE DB for OLAP API and OLAP Services. Hyperion System 9 BI + Analytic Services uses MaxL (Multidimensional Access Language). MDSQL (Multidimensional Query Language) is yet another query language. With Interactive Reporting Studio, you do not need to know SQL or any multidimensional query languages to create powerful database queries. You build queries by choosing the data you want to retrieve from a visual representation of the database. Interactive Reporting Studio offers two query methods, each of which is displayed as a separate section within an Interactive Reporting Studio document:
Query Displays the structure of the relational database as tables (or topics), which are used to create a data modelthe visual representation of the database tables. An Interactive Reporting Studio document can have more than one data model. OLAPQuery Displays the structure of the multidimensional database as a hierarchical tree. OLAP queries are displayed in a form similar to a pivot table, except the data comes straight from the OLAP server.
A Interactive Reporting Studio document can contain one or more relational Query sections as well as one or more OLAPQuery sections. This allows users access to information in organizations that have both types of databases.
Tables Columnar arrangements of data. Tables are used as building blocks in other reporting sections. You can apply filters to tables, add computed items, include subtotals and grand totals, as well as summary totals such as sum, count or average.
26
Pivot tables Interactive tables that quickly summarize or cross-tabulate large amounts of data. You can rotate rows and columns to see different summaries of data or display the details for areas of interest. A pivot table summarized data by using a summary function that you specify, such as Sum, Count, or Average. You can include subtotals and grand totals automatically, or use your own formulas by adding computed items. Charts A visual display of information; fully interactive, three-dimensional views of data. Interactive Reporting Studio displays data from results sets as bars, lines, columns, pie slices, or other shapes in the chart. When you create a chart, the values from the worksheet are automatically represented in the chart. Charts are linked to the data they are created from and are updated when you change the data. Custom reports Using an Interactive Reporting Studio Report Designer, you can create free-form presentation-quality reports with graphic objects, predefined fields, band-style report data from multiple data sources and computed fields, charts, and pivots; Smart reports enable you to embed charts and pivot tables and show only the data that is relevant to the section in which they are placed.
27
28
Chapter Chapter
This chapter offers a tutorial showing basic data analysis techniques. It also familiarizes you with the powerful capabilities and features of the Interactive Reporting Studio. To use this tutorial, you must have access to Interactive Reporting Studio and their sample database and documents. A connection to your company database is not necessary.
In This Chapter
Starting the Interactive Reporting Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Opening and Saving a Sample File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Looking at a Simple Query. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Pivoting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Charting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Designing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
29
To open Sample1.bqy:
1 In the Welcome dialog box, select Recent Documents from the Open Existing Documents area. 2 Click Browse and navigate to the Samples folder in the appropriate Interactive Reporting Studio folder (for
example, the Designer folder or the Explorer folder).
Note: If you cannot locate the sample files, please contact your Interactive Reporting Studio administrator.
4 Select File > Save Options > Save Query Results with Document.
The Save Query Results With Document dialog box opens.
5 Make sure that the all of the items in the Query, Results and the Computed Columns lists are selected, and
then click OK.
6 Select File > Save As to open the Save File dialog box. 7 Type a new name for the sample document (for example, practice.bqy) and click Save.
30
31
You build queries by adding topics from the Content pane to the Request line. You can drag and drop any topic item to the Request line. When you process a query, Interactive Reporting Studio return data for all the topic items present on the Request line. In the sample, several topic items from each table have already been dragged to the Request line (for example, Unit Sales, Amount Sales, Year, Quarter, and so on). You can also add filters to the data, or specify columns by which to sort the data. You can apply filters and sorts in either the Query section or the Results section. In the Query section, filters instruct the database server to filter unwanted information from the requested data. Sorts instruct the database server to retrieve data to your desktop in a particular order.
Viewing Results
Data returned from a query is displayed in the Results section. Each column of results corresponds to items on the Request Line in the Query section. Request items are listed in the Catalog pane.
Reordering Columns
To reorder columns in the Results section, drag one column to the left or right of another
column. You can also move column labels in the Data Layout.
Sorting Columns
To sort columns of data:
1 If the Sort line does not show, click Sort(0) on the Section title bar. 2 Drag Product Line from the Catalog pane to the Sort line. 3 Click Sort Now to group items by Product Line.
32
Filtering Data
At times you may have more data in a column than you want. Use the Filter line to filter the data displayed in a column.
To filter data:
1 If the filter line does not show, click filters(0) on the Section title bar. 2 Drag Amount Sales from the Catalog pane to the filter line.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
[Ctrl+L]
3 Select >=Greater or Equal from the filter drop-down list. 4 Click Custom Values, type 100000 in the field provided, and click OK.
All entries with sales amounts less than $100,000 dollars are dropped from the Results section.
To remove a data filter, delete Amount Sales from the Filter line.
The data is redisplayed when you remove the filter.
Calculating Data
Interactive Reporting Studio can perform calculations on columns of numeric data.
2 Select Results > Grand Total and click OK. 3 Scroll down to the bottom of the table to view the total amount of sales.
BMV total sales for 1999-2000 are $132,881. If the figure you see does not match $132,881, you need to remove any filters imposed on the results. Delete any filters from the Filter line and view the total again. The sum automatically adjusts. If you see ########, the number is too large to fit in the designated space.
To resize the column, select Format > Column > Auto-Size Width.
Viewing Results
33
Pivoting Data
In Sample1.bqy, the SalesPivot section is a simple example of a pivot table. Pivot tables provide multiple angles on your data.
To pivot views:
1 Click the dimension tab at the end of the row labels. 2 Drag the tab down and left to turn your row into a column.
The same data is displayed but with a different angle on the data.
3 Take the tab of the newly formed column and drag it so it becomes a row again.
34
Subtotals
Total
Dimension Handles
6 Select the handle for Product Line and select Pivot > Add Totals.
A row is added that shows the subtotals (also know as break totals) for each product line by region.
Drilling Down
More data is available for analysis than is currently visible in your pivot table.
To drill anywhere, select the Region column and select Pivot > Drill Anywhere > Country.
A column is added to your pivot table that shows countries within region.
To restore the original pivot table without the Unit Sales column, select the Country column
and select Pivot > Drillup.
Viewing Results
35
Hiding Data
You can temporarily hide data.
To hide an item, select a label such as the Americas label and select Pivot > Hide Items. To focus on an item, select a label such as the Americas label and select Pivot > Focus On Items. To restore your excluded items, select Pivot > Show All Items.
Adding Color
Use the Format toolbar to add color to emphasize aspects of your pivot table.
Note: If the Format toolbar is not visible, select View > Toolbars > Formatting.
Charting Data
Interactive Reporting Studio charting features make graphic analysis of data and powerful presentations simple. In Sample1.bqy, the AllChart section is a chart based on the data from the original query.
To view the Chart section, select Pivot > Show All Items.
The AllChart section is displayed. Interactive Reporting Studio rapidly converts data from one chart type to another.
To change the chart type and format, select a chart format from the Chart list.
As you shift from one chart type to another, data may be shifted to different axes.
36
4 Delete Chart and type Unit Sales Region, and then click OK. 5 If the Data Layout is not already visible, click Data Layout on the Section title bar.
Numeric values (facts) are placed in the y pane in the Data Layout. Non-numeric data (dimensions) are placed in the x pane and z pane in the Data Layout.
6 Drag Unit Sales to the x pane in Data Layout. 7 Drag Region to the z pane in Data Layout. 8 Drag Product Line to the y pane in Data Layout. 9 Click a Legend box to change the distribution and patterns of colors.
Sorting Charts
It is often useful to order the bars of a chart sequentially.
2 Type the text you want to insert and click OK. 3 Drag the text box to any position on the chart.
Charting Data
37
Designing Reports
The Report Designer is another way to analyze and present data and offers a great deal of formatting flexibility. You can embed either a pivot table or a chart directly in a report.
2 Click Groups and Table on the Section title bar to see all panes in the Data Layout.
In the Report section, create reports by dragging items from the Catalog pane to the Groups Data Layout and the Table Data Layout. The Groups Data Layout allows you to drag nonquantifiable items and create separate tables for each label in a report group. In other words, when you designate a results column to serve as a report group, you instruct Interactive Reporting Studio to organize data in repeating collections of records according to the Report group. The Table Data Layout is divided into the Dimensions and Facts panes. The Facts pane allows you to drag quantifiable items to show quantity. Totals are generated automatically in the report body. The Dimensions pane allows you to drag nonquantifiable items to itemize the facts.
3 In the Catalog pane, double-click the SalesQuery folder, and then click the plus sign to the left of the
SalesResults folder.
4 Drag Year and Quarter into the Dimensions pane in Table Data Layout. 5 Drag Amount Sales into the Facts pane in Table Data Layout. 6 Drag Territory to the Report Group 1 field of the Groups Data Layout. 7 Drag Country to the Report Group 2 field of the Groups Data Layout.
The new report has visible section boundaries. Results columns added to the Facts pane are automatically summed and the totals are displayed in the tabular report of the report table column.
Note: You can disable automatic totaling.
38
Allow some white space between the embedded chart and the table. In the newly-created Smart report, the chart changes to reflect the data specific to each country within a territory.
Sorting Columns
To sort table columns, select a table column, anddrag it to the Sort line.
Multiple table columns can be added to the Sort line to create a nested sort.
2 On the Margin page, set margin sizes (top, bottom, left, and right) and click OK. 3 On the Column page, specify the number of columns on a page and the default column width and spacing,
then click OK.
Page breaks can be inserted before and after a report body or before and after a Report Group label.
To insert a page break, select a Report Group header (be careful not to select the Report Group
label) and on the shortcut menu, select Page Break After or Page Break Before.
To remove a page break, select a Report Group header with a page break applied, and on the
shortcut menu, select Page Break After or Page Break Before to remove the check mark.
Designing Reports
39
40
Chapter
This chapter provides an overview of the Interactive Reporting Studio workspace and describes fundamental features and functions. These features, available through the File, Edit, View, Insert, and Tools menus, help you manage documents and provide numerous ways to manipulate data in the query and results sections.
In This Chapter
Using the Interactive Reporting Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Managing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Changing Workspace Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Inserting Sections and Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Formatting Numeric Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
41
Main Menu
The Main menu provides access to all menus and functions. In addition, certain menus change based on the active section. Every section has a unique menu whose label matches the name of the section. Interactive Reporting Studio also provide extensive shortcut menus.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide quick access to frequently used functions and features. Available toolbars include:
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains icons for commonly used operations.
Navigation Toolbar
The Navigation toolbar returns to the dashboard from another section when the Section catalog, Section title bar, toolbars, and menus are turned off. This toolbar is hidden by default. When activated, it includes the Back and Forward buttons and a dashboard Home button.
Formatting Toolbar
The Formatting toolbar provides text formatting, styling, and editing commands.
42
Section Toolbar
The Section toolbar provides commands for a specific document section.
Command Lines
You use command lines to complete important operations during the query and reporting processes. The command lines that ar are determined by the active section. All command lines can be docked, resized or hidden. The command lines available in each section are:
Query Section Request, Filter and Sort Results Section Filter and Sort Report Section Sort and Expression
Data Layout
Data Layouts are drag-and-drop templates used in the Pivot, Chart, Results, OLAPQuery, and Report sections. Each Data Layout pane corresponds to a specific layout element of the report. Data Layout allow you to easily view, plot, and manipulate the data in the Content pane.
To display the Data Layout for a section, click Data Layout on the Section Titlebar.
Section Pane
The Section pane lists the sections available in the current document. Possible sections include:
Dashboard A document front-end that can be customized, which makes it easy for developers to build and deploy analytic applications and for end users to access information. Report A dynamic and analytical designer that provides the ability to easily develop a complete range of reports. Use the Report Designers visual layout capabilities to drag and drop columns, expression, charts, logos, bitmaps, and other items to quickly design and customize your reports. Query The foundation of the document, the Query section enables you to connect to a relational database and download a prebuilt query or data model, or build a new data model and create your own query. Results Created when you process a query or import data. retrieves data to your desktop and displays it in the Results sections as columns in a table.
43
Pivot An interactive table that quickly summarizes, or cross-tabulates, large amounts of data. You can rotate its rows and columns to see different summaries of the source data, or display the details for areas of interest. Chart A fully interactive, two- or three-dimensional view of your data that provides powerful ways to visually analyze your data. Table A single-dimension report that displays your data in columns. Tables are often used as building blocks in other sections. OLAPQuery A query section specifically designed for connecting to multidimensional databases. OLAPResults Results section for an OLAPQuery.
Catalog Pane
The Catalog pane contains the objects you use to build contents. For example in the Pivot section, the Catalog pane contains Results columns. In the Query section, the Catalog pane contains the tables available in your database. In the Report Designer section, the catalog pane contains the Results, Pivot, and Chart sections in addition to available graphic and field elements To use an object, drag it from the Catalog pane to the Content pane or to the Data Layout.
Content Pane
The Content pane displays a data model or provides a view of the content from a Query, Pivot, Chart, or Dashboard section.
Status Bar
The Status bar, located below the Content pane, displays information about the current database connection, document, and document section.
Connected You must be connected to a database to work in the Query section. Disconnected You do not need to be connected to a database for many Interactive Reporting Studio tasks.
44
Managing Documents
Managing documents involves:
Maintaining Documents Saving Documents Specifying Save Options Exporting Data Printing Documents
Maintaining Documents
Review the following sections for information on:
2 Select the file that you want to open and click OK.
Closing a Document
Note: Document shutdown scripts are only executed when a document is closed.
Saving Documents
When you save a document, you save the current formatting and layout of all sections in the document. You can also save the Results section data for work offline.
Note: The Save and Save As commands in Interactive Reporting Studio, Interactive Reporting Web Client, and Workspace do not execute the document shutdown scripts when saving the document. These scripts only execute when a document is closed.
45
To save a document, click the Save button on the standard toolbar, or select File > Save. To save the document under a different name:
1 Select File > Save As.
The Save File dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a name for the document in the File Name field and click Save.
Save Query Results With Document Compress Document Password Protect Document
Compress Document
The Compress Document option condenses the number of bytes in a document and saves the document in a compressed file format. It enables you to quickly transmit the document and saves valuable storage space. Compression concentrates the number of bytes by removing empty data fields and unnecessary information. automatically decompresses the file when you reopen it.
Tip: To configure so that it compresses all documents when saving, use the Compress All
2 In the Password field, type the password you want to assign to this document.
Passwords can contain up to 38 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.
3 In the Verify Password field, retype the password and click OK.
If the password and the verification do not match, an error message is displayed.
Caution!
Keep a list of each document and the specific password needed to access it in a secure place.
Restrict access to a document script and the scripting environment. This ensures the integrity and confidentiality of sensitive scripts in a Dashboard section and when you are working with document scripts.
Enable encryption for startup, shutdown, document, and Dashboard scripts associated with Interactive Reporting documents. You must supply a valid to encrypt scripts. (Encrypted scripts are not functional in releases prior to 6.6.3 or 8.1.) You can still password protect a document without encrypting any scripts associated with it. You can define a default encyption state on the General Options tab of the Designer Options dialog box. When you create a new BQY, the default encryption state will match the one on the Designer Options dialog box. Despite the default setting, scripts are only encrypted if the BQY has a valid Design mode password.
2 In the Password field, enter the password required to open the document script.
Passwords can contain up to 38 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.
3 In the Verify Password field, retype the password and click OK.
If the password and the verification do not match, an error message is displayed.
47
Select File > Document Scripts. Click the Design/Run icon in the Dashboard section run mode.
2 Enter the password required to open the script and click OK.
To encrypt a script:
1 In the Password field, enter the design mode password required to open the script.
Passwords can contain up to 38 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.
2 In the Verify Password field, retype the password and click OK.
If the password and the verification do not match, an error message is displayed.
48
Excel (*.xls) (the Import feature supports style and font information and Unicode strings [Excel 2000, Excel 2003 file formats]). All files (*.*)
Note: If an Excel (.xls) file to be imported is not in table format, you receive the following error message: Warning: Data you are trying to import is not in a tabular format. Do you still want to import it? At this point, you can either reformat the data in the Excel file to a table format, or continue the import. If you continue the format, the data does not map in the BQY.
Import SQL
The Import SQL command allows you to take a complete SQL statement from a text file, import it into an existing query, and retrieve the data set from the database server. Use this feature to take advantage of SQL statements you have already written. Before importing SQL files, make sure that the following conditions are true:
The SQL file you want to import begins with a SELECT statement. The Query section of your document is active. The connection to the database is active. The Content pane does not contain any tables.
You also need to know the number of columns to display in the Results section. After you import the SQL file into the Query section:
You cannot edit it. You cannot drag items from the table to the Request line. You cannot use the custom SQL feature. You cannot display its properties.
However, you can specify a user-friendly name for the Request item and identify its data type.
2 Navigate to the location of the file you want to import. 3 Select the file you want to import and click OK.
prompts you for the number of data columns. The number that is by default in the dialog box is an estimate.
49
Exporting Data
allows you to export data to other file formats for use with applications. Review the following sections for information on exporting data:
Defining Export Properties for Dynamic HTML in the Results and Table Sections Defining Export Properties for Dynamic HTML in the Pivot and OLAP Section Defining Export Properties for Dynamic HTML in the Chart Section Defining Export Properties for Dynamic HTML in the Report Section Defining Export Properties for Static HTML in the Results and Table Sections Defining Export Properties for Static HTML in the Pivot and OLAP Sections Defining Export Properties for Static HTML in the Report Section Exporting a Section Exporting to Microsoft Office HTML File Formats Exporting a Document as a Web Page Browser and HTML Restrictions and Limitations Using the Export to HTML Wizard Exporting SQL Exporting a Query Log
Defining Export Properties for Dynamic HTML in the Results and Table Sections
Before exporting data to an HTML file to use in the Hyperion System 9 BI+ Workspace use the Export Properties dialog box to specify export properties for data. The Export Properties dialog box is separated into two discrete sections for exporting either to dynamic or static HTML. Common export features are shown at the top of the dialog. The options in this section allow you to override any default pregeneration settings defined for the document. Before any new setting takes effect, you must publish (or republish) the BQY file. Any dynamic HTML changes you make either through the Export Properties dialog box or through the Object Model are not inherited until you republish the BQY file. Static HTML by definition has pregenerated data and is stored locally.
50
2 Specify the number of vertical rows to include on an HTML page before starting a new page (file) by
checking the Vertical Page Break checkbox and entering the number of rows.
The default setting is 100 rows per HTML page. (Select Pixels to specify the number of pixels instead of rows). To export to one file or to have no page break, leave the Vertical Page Break checkbox blank.
3 In the Dynamic HTML section, select the desired dynamic export properties.
Specify to pregenerate the HTML for All Pages. Enabling pregeneration for all pages can place high demands on the Hyperion System 9 BI + Repository, especially if the section is large. (Select First and Last _ pages to specify a range of pages to pregenerate).
4 For data exported to tab-delimited text files, select the Export Without Quotes check box to exclude
double quotation marks around real column/cell values in the exported files.
5 Click OK.
Defining Export Properties for Dynamic HTML in the Pivot and OLAP Section
Before exporting data to an HTML file to use in the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace, use the Export Properties dialog box to specify export properties for data. The Export Properties dialog box is separated into two discrete sections for exporting either to dynamic or static HTML. Common export features are shown at the top of the dialog. The options in this section allow you to override any default pregeneration settings. Before any new setting takes effect, you must publish (or republish) the BQY file. Any dynamic HTML changes you make either through the Export Properties dialog box or through the Object Model are not inherited until you republish the BQY file. Static HTML by definition has pregenerated data and is stored locally.
2 Specify the number of vertical rows to include on an HTML page before starting a new page (file) by
checking the Vertical Page Break checkbox and entering the number of rows.
The default setting is 100 rows per HTML page. (Select Pixels to specify the number of pixels instead of rows). To export to one file or to have no page break, leave the Vertical Page Break checkbox blank.
3 Specify the number of horizontal columns to include on an HTML page before starting a new page (file) by
checking the Horizontal Page Break checkbox and entering the number of rows.
The default setting is 100 columns per HTML page. (Select Pixels to specify the number of pixels instead of columns). To export to one file or to have no page break, leave the Horizontal Page Break checkbox blank.
51
4 In the Dynamic HTML section, select the desired dynamic export properties.
Specify to pregenerate the HTML for All Pages. Enabling pregeneration for all pages can place high demands on the Repository, especially if the section is large. (Select First and Last _ pages to specify a range of pages to pregenerate).
5 For data exported to tab-delimited text files, select the Export Without Quotes check box to exclude
double quotation marks around real column/cell values in the exported files.
6 Click OK.
2 To match the maximum number of bars displayed (X and Z directions) for HTML renderings (static or
Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace) with the corresponding values on the Label Axis tab of the Chart Properties dialog (that is, use the Designer settings for the chart), check the Sync with Chart Properties field.
To manually set the maximum number of bars to display per view, uncheck the Sync with Chart Properties field. When the X-Axis Maximum Bars Displayed and Z-Axis Maximum Bars displayed are active, you can set the maximum number of bars to display for both the X axis and the Z axis. The horizontal scrollbar controls scrolling of the X axis, and the Vertical scrollbar controls scrolling of the Z axis.
52
Defining Export Properties for Static HTML in the Results and Table Sections
Before exporting data to static HTML, use the Export Properties dialog box to specify export properties for data in the Results and Table sections.
2 Specify the number of vertical rows to include on an HTML page before starting a new page (file) by
checking the Vertical Page Break checkbox and entering the number of rows.
The default setting is 100 rows per HTML page. (Select Pixels to specify the number of pixels instead of rows). To export to one file, or to have no page break, leave the Vertical Page Break checkbox blank.
4 Select the Export MS Excel formulas check box to export Interactive Reporting computed items to Excel. To
export a raw table (without formulas), leave the check box blank.
By default the Export MS Excel formulas feature is enabled. For more information about including formulas in a section to be exported to Excel, see Formula Mappings on page 62.
5 For data exported to tab-delimited text files, select the Export Without Quotes check box to exclude
double quotation marks around real column/cell values in the exported files and click OK.
53
Defining Export Properties for Static HTML in the Pivot and OLAP Sections
Before exporting data to static HTML, use the Export Properties dialog box to specify export properties for data in the Pivot section.
2 Specify the number of vertical rows to include on an HTML page before starting a new page (file) by
checking the Vertical Page Break checkbox and entering the number of rows.
The default setting is 100 rows per HTML page. (Select Pixels to specify the number of pixels instead of rows). To export to one file, or to have no page break, leave the Vertical Page Break checkbox blank.
3 Specify the number of horizontal columns to include on an HTML page before starting a new page (file) by
checking the Horizontal Page Break checkbox and entering the number of rows.
The default setting is 100 rows per HTML page. (Select Pixels to specify the number of pixels instead of rows). To export to one file, or to have no page break, leave the Horizontal Page Break checkbox blank.
5 For data exported to tab-delimited text files, select the Export Without Quotes check box to exclude
double quotation marks around real column/cell values in the exported files.
6 Click OK.
3 Click OK.
54
Exporting a Section
After processing a query, you can export the data contents of the Results, Pivot, Chart, Table, or Report sections for use in other applications. If you export from a Results section, the data is raw and unaggregated. If you export from a report section, the data is already aggregated.
2 Specify the location where you want to save the file. 3 Type a name for the section to be exported in the File Name field. 4 Select a file format from the Save As Type drop-down list. Select from:
Microsoft Office 2000 HTML (*.html) Microsoft Office Web Archive (*.mhtml) Excel (*.xls) Lotus 1-2-3 (*.wks) Text (Tab delimited) (*.txt) Text (Comma Delimited) (*.csv) HTML (*.htm) PDF (*.pdf)
The available export file formats change depending on which section you export.
Note: Select Format > Export Properties to set properties for files exported to text or HTML.
55
Microsoft Office 2000 HTML (*.html) Microsoft Office Web Archive (*.mhtml) Standard HTML (*.html)
56
Comparison of HTML File Formats Office HTML Export to Office Excel Formatting is preserved. Formulas are supported. (See Formula Mappings). Standard HTML Export to Excel Formatting is not preserved. Formulas are not supported. Export does preserve formatting. Export does not support formulas. Cell margins are not supported.
Section Results/Table
Pivot
Chart
The Chart section is written to two worksheets: the first worksheet contains the Chart data in a table, and the second worksheet contains the Chart image. Exported Chart data is aggregated in the same way as it is aggregated in the original Chart Section.
Tip: When a Chart section has been exported to Excel, you can use the data in the table as a data source and launch the Excel Chart Wizard to create the actual Chart. The rendered Chart looks the same as the one created in Designer.
57
Table 1
Comparison of HTML File Formats (Continued) Office HTML Export to Office Excel The Report data is written to a simple table. If a report has only one table or only one pivot (no matter how many pictures and/or text labels), then column widths are preserved. Otherwise column width are not maintained. Column width, in this case, will be made sufficient to fit data from any table. Formatting is preserved. Report elements including: text, labels, images, tables, pivots, and charts are placed one after another vertically. A vertical gap of a certain fixed height will exist between two elements. If elements overlap vertically by a small value these elements are with shown no gap between them. This is to accommodate any design that includes stacked elements. The gap is one row high. Report headers/footers will be output. Graphical elements such as lines, circles are not supported. Overlapping tables are not supported and are computed consecutively. Page headers/footers are not supported. Standard HTML Export to Excel The Report data is written to a simple table.
Section Report
Dashboard
Not supported
58
Any text within BI format strings is enclosed double-quotes ( ). Interactive Reporting fills the number formats for positive, negative and zero numbers to achieve compatibility with Excels construction. Excel number format definition consists of the above number formats, delimited with a semi-colon. Date/time formats are exported as is except for the am/pm format, which receives a special format. Thousands and decimal separators are converted to Excel special symbols based on the default BI locale format. When the Interactive Reporting number format is evaluated, the format is converted so that the decimal separator becomes . and thousand separator becomes , in the target Excel format. Excel treats these special symbols as locale independent separators and replaces them with actual separators from users locale on the run-time. A value in an Excel cell has two aspects: the value formatted for displaying and the original value. Similarly when a value is placed in a HTML table, a special attribute x:num=<actual value> is used to preserve the original value. The pre-formatted value is placed in a cell of the HTML table, and it can be shown in the web browser. Formulas operate with the original values. The x:str attribute is used as a global designator in a html <table> in order to tell Excel that all the values which do not have x:num attribute specified should be treated as strings. This is useful when there is mixed string and numeric data in a string type column. The third component associated with a HTML table cell is a style class. It is used to specify the custom numeric format for a cell value. Date and time values are represented as numbers. These values and saved in the x:num attribute, and the style class definition specifies the format for date.
Styles
Exported sections support styles (CSS) that have been applied to the section including: font name and size, and bold/italic properties. The Interactive Reporting overline and double overline properties are not supported in Excel, because Excel has no equivalent styles. The simple overline style is supported in a browser: the double overline is not. In addition, the overline applies only to the text, not the whole cell as in Designer. The Spotlighter feature is not supported in Excel. The appearance of a cell to which the spotlighter has been applied, retains the same look as in the exported spreadsheet, but without the real auto-formatting. Excel has an equivalent feature called Conditional Formatting. This feature can use a formula returning a Boolean result as a condition.
59
Colors
Excel supports a fifty-six color palette of which sixteen are used exclusively for Charts, and forty for cells in a spreadsheet. Colors can be defined by using RGB notation, and shared among all worksheets in a workbook. All colors displayed in the sections being exported are saved as a custom palette and saved in the HTML file (in a hidden xml section). The color palette that is used in Excel by default, is used as a basis for creating a custom palette. The colors that match Excels retain their positions. Unused positions are filled by default Excel colors. Excel automatically determines which index in the color palette to use for a particular color occurring in CSS. If the total number of colors is more than forty, Excel determines the color placement.
Text Wrapping
If text wrapping is disabled in Designer and the section is exported, Excel sizes the column so that all values within a row are displayed, but the words that do not fit into the cell are wrapped to the next line and therefore are not visible. In the browser, the text is truncated.
Chart as Image
A worksheet containing a chart image shows no cell grid. Charts that take up more than single image (this is when chart scrolling is enabled) are placed on a single worksheet, and page breaks are provided. Each image is printed on its own page.
Printing Improvements
Results/Table and Pivot sections are exported so that the table headings and pivot top/side labels are marked. These marks allow headings and labels to be duplicated on each page when they are printed from Excel.
60
Formula Generation
An exported BQY table section can have the following kinds of JavaScript expressions:
Grand/Break Total calculation (for example, Sum(Units, Breaks) + 10) Grand/Break Total labels (for example, "Total "+ ToChar(Store)) Computed Item expressions (for example, Units*2 + 10)
When exporting a table with expressions, the following steps are performed:
Values that are calculated using formulas are exported to HTML, and available to be shown in a web browser. Excel formulas are generated for each cell in the table and written to HTML. This file can be opened then in Excel and all the values are re-calculated. An end-user can change values in the cells and results will be re-calculated again.
JavaScript Expressions
JavaScript expressions used with the Export to HTML feature can refer to columns in the table and invoke computed items. They can also refer to any JavaScript class like Math and String. Those computed items which do not have direct equivalent among the built-in Excel functions are simulated by custom VB functions. For information about how Interactive Reporting computed items map to Excels built-in function, see Formula Mappings on page 62. If the expression refers to a JavaScript class not supported by the Export feature, then #NAME? is displayed in the Excel cell (and as a valid value in the web browser) and the seer office html tag attribute is used. In addition, a comment is to the cell explaining the error. In Excel, this comment is displayed near the cell where error occurred. In browser, the comment is displayed when the mouse pointer is hovered over the cell with a small red-colored corner.
Continuous range which corresponds to the whole column (for example, Units) Aggregate range this is a continuous range which gets broken by Break Totals (for example Units_Agg). The only purpose of this range is to be a data source for aggregate functions (hence the name). The translator uses Units in all kind of expressions that refer to the column, but it uses Units_Agg range for aggregate functions, for example, SUM(Units_Agg). Continuous sub-range used in break total computation. Individual cell references (for example, A1, B5)
The table below outlines how the JavaScript expression operations are mapped to Excel.
61
JavaScript *, /, <=, =>, -, + (arithmetical plus operator) % != == + (concatenation operator) Exp1 ? Exp2 : Exp3 (ternary operator) Comma operator (e.g. exp1, exp2, , expN)
MS Excel Uses the same symbols. MOD() built-in function <> = & IF(Exp1, Exp2, Exp3) Replaced with the last expression. For example, (exp1, exp2, , expN) -> replace with expN in resulting Excel formula. Expressions should be of the same type (expression or string) NOT() built-in function AND() built-in function OR() built-in function Converts to string literal (for example, a) Converts to a decimal number (for example, 16, 8) Converts to Excels TRUE and FALSE Expressions with null have limited support. Column values can be compared with null. Computed Items should not produce null values. Replaced with CHAR(x) in output string.For example: a & CHAR(10) & a
! && || Character literal (e.g. a) Hexadecimal and octal number (e.g. 0x10, 010) Logical constants (true and false) Expressions with null
The JavaScript + operator can be applied to strings and denotes a string concatenation. Excels string concatenation operator is &. Interactive Reporting distinguishes between arithmetic + and string + by tracking the type of arguments in expressions. If one of the arguments is a string literal, then a concatenation operator is used. The translator tracks return type of Object Model functions and columns, so it can infer final expression type. There are three supported types: numeric, string and date.
Formula Mappings
Most of the computed items that comprise computed item expressions can be mapped directly to Excel functions. Certain functions have different numbers of arguments and/or argument order and require additional processing. The following table shows which Interactive Reporting computed items map to Excel formulas.
62
Table 2
Interactive Reporting Computed Item Decode Nvl AddMonth DayOfMonth LastDay MonthsBetween NextDay Sysdate ToChar(value, format)
Microsoft Excel Function H_Decode Limited support: Nvl(column, expr). H_AddMonth DAY H_LastDay H_MonthsBetween H_NextDay NOW Limited Support: Excels built-in TEXT(val, format) function is used and the format argument is translated from the BI format into Excels on the formula generation time. Consequently, the format should always be a constant string literal. When the argument for ToChar is a column reference, then converts to TEXT(column, format), where format is one of real/int/date_format depending on the column type (DATEVALUE(x) + TIMEVALUE(x)) H_ToMonth H_ToQtr YEAR ABS ATAN H_Ceil COS COSH
Implementation VBA Excel VBA Excel VBA VBA VBA Excel Excel
Aggregation
ToChar(column)
63
Table 2
Interactive Reporting Computed Item Exp Floor Ln Log Log10 Max Min Mod Power Round Sign Sin Sinh Tan Tanh Trunc Avg AvgNonNull Chr ColMax ColMin Count CountDistinct
Microsoft Excel Function EXP H_Floor LN LOG LOG10 MAX MIN H_MOD POWER ROUND SIGN SIN SINH TAN TANH TRUNC H_Avg AVERAGE H_Chr H_ColMax H_ColMin H_Count H_CountDistinct. Limited Support: Can be used in Break/Grand Totals ONLY (performance considerations as it uses heavy computations).
Implementation Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel VBA Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel Excel VBA Excel VBA VBA VBA VBA VBA/Excel
Aggregation
CountNonNull CountNull
COUNTA H_CountNull
Excel VBA
64
Table 2
Microsoft Excel Function Computed Items with expressions that have exactly one call to Cume() and nothing else. Example: Cume(Units) Function call is converted to appropriate cell reference. Limited support: Cannot be used in Break or Grand Total expression.
Implementation Excel/VBA
Next
Excel/VBA
Prior
Function call is converted to appropriate cell reference. Limited support: Cannot be used in Break or Grand Total expression.
Excel
Sum
Use Excels SUM() for nonstring columns. String columns exception: H_SumStr() will be used here. Can be used in Break and Grand Totals only. (performance considerations as it uses heavy computations).
Excel/VBA
Median Mode
MEDIAN H_Mode Mode maps to Excels H_Mode because Excels MODE does not support complex ranges. Mode can only be used in Break and Grand Totals. There may be performance considerations associated with this computed item because it uses heavy computations.
Excel VBA
Percentile
H_Percentile
VBA
65
Table 2
Microsoft Excel Function H-Rank Rank maps to Excels H_Rank function. Rank can only be used in Break/Grand Totals expressions. There may be performance considerations associated with this computed item because it uses heavy computations.
Implementation VBA
Aggregation
RankAsc(column)
H-RankAsc This function can only be used in Break andGrand Totals expressions. There may be performance considerations associated with this computed item because it uses heavy computations.
VBA
StdDev StdDevp Var Varp Ascii Concat Initcap Instr Length Lower Ltrim Replace Rtrim Substr Translate Upper MovingAvg MovingDiff
H-StdDev H_StdDevp Var Varp CODE CONCATENATE H_Initcap H_Instr LEN LOWER H_Ltrim H_Replace H_Rtrim MID H_Translate UPPER H_MovingAvg H_MovingDiff
VBAl VBA VBA VBA Excel Excel VBA VBA Excel Excel VBA VBA VBA Excel VBA Excel VBA VBA
66
Table 2
Interactive Reporting Computed Item MovingMax MovingMed MovingMin MovingSum All aggregate functions with two and three arguments: Ex. Sum(col, break_col, break_value)
Microsoft Excel Function H_MovingMax H_MovingMed H_MovingMin H_MovingSum When two-argument functions are used in Break/Grand Total expressions and the second argument is Breaks, most of the functions are converted to their built-in Excel equivalents. Otherwise, the function is substituted with the appropriate H_xxx() VBA function.
Aggregation Cross references in rows Cross references in rows Cross references in rows Cross references in rows
Custom Formulas
Interactive Reporting has a number of computed items that do not map directly to an equivalent Excel function. This section describes the methods the Export feature uses to construct a mapping from the Interactive Reportingcomputed item to an Excel function.
67
Unsupported Formulas
Excel has a limitation for formula content length. This limit is 1,024 characters. In Interactive Reporting, a null value is absent of data, but does not equal zero. Excel does not recognize null values, but has a similar concept. Cells that are absent of data are represented by blank cells. There are also built-in aggregation functions analogs which understand this concept
A continuous cell range that includes the whole column. For example: Units = Results!$C$2:$C$998. This range can be used in all kin of formula expressions, but cannot be passed to aggregate functions like SUM.
A compound or broken cell range that includes all the cells with actual data excluding those occupied by Total information. For example: Units_Agg = Results!$C$2:$C$4,Results!$C$6:$C$34,Results!$C$36:$C$164. This range can be passed to aggregate functions, which is reflected in its the name.
Below is a sample spreadsheet generated from the Results section. The column Computed of the section contained Units*2 expression, the column Computed2 contained SUM(Units) expression. The generated Excel formulas may be seen in the cells.
For the Excel user, the Auto Outlining feature can be used to create row groups from the Break Totals that Interactive Reporting creates. Excel analyzes the formulas and creates the row groups and outline automatically. The user can then expand/collapse individual groups of rows.
68
Named cell ranges created in Interactive Reporting can be used in the in-sheet formulas and in an external Excel file (worksheet linking). For example, an end user can create a new Excel file and put a formula to a cell referring to a data column of the workbook file exported from Interactive Reporting: =SUM(BIExport.xls!Results_Units_Agg), where Results_Units_Agg is an auto-generated range that denotes the Units column of the Results table in the BIExport.xls file.
The name of section to be exported should not be longer than thirty-one characters in the name The symbols / \ ? * are not allowed and are removed. Duplicate worksheet names are appended with a number to ensure the uniqueness of each worksheet. A worksheet name can include space symbols. Leaving space symbols in worksheet names improves user experience. When such a worksheet name is used in formulas, it should be surrounded with single quotation marks.
Generated range names that correspond to BQY table columns are based on a respective column name. The following restrictions apply to generated range names:
The worksheet name is added to the beginning of the range name to ensure its uniqueness within the whole workbook. Spaces within the name are replaced by underscores. The symbols ~!@#$%^&*()_+|{}:<>?`-=\[];,./ are not allowed and are removed. Duplicate range name are appended with a number to ensure the uniqueness of each range name.should be provided. Columns must have appropriate identifiers in JavaScript, for instance, Order Date column can be referred to as Order_Date in a computed item expression. This identifier is used as the main part of a generated range name. Excel has a limitation on the length of the expression used as a named range. The total length of the of references (not including worksheet names) can not be more than 255 characters. When a named range is generated, its content is broken into smaller chunks, each comprising a smaller named range. The final range is a union of these smaller ranges.
69
Chart, OLAPQuery, and reports created with the Report Designer. Imported sections that have been added to the document, such as text files and Excel files, can also be exported. Data models and the Query, and Dashboard sections are not exportable. Neither are empty or blank sections. After these files are posted to a Web site, you can access the files individually or use the main HTML file to view the frameset, which lists the sections in the report. The exported Web pages include navigation buttons so you can scroll back and forth between pages, or jump to the beginning or end of a document. In addition, the current page number and total number of pages are included in the report.
Note: The Export As HTML and HTML Wizard options in prior versions of Interactive Reporting remain unchanged. However, we recommend that you use the Export As Web Page option.
2 Select the sections of the document that you want to export and click OK.
To select all sections, click Select All. To clear all selected sections, click Deselect All. The Save As Type dialog box is displayed.
3 Navigate to the location where you want to save your Web page.
Tip: Create a separate folder to store the files created by this export option.
4 Type a name for the exported Web page in the File Name field, or accept the default name, for example
Sample1.htm.
The Save As Type field is set to *.htm by default. All of the HTML files that the export process creates begin with the name specified in the File Name field, for example, Sample1Chart.htm, Sample1Pivot.htm, and so on. The HTML file with the exact same name as the name specified in the File Name field is the main HTML page, and it contains the frameset and links to all of the other pages, for example Sample1.htm.
5 Click Save.
To view the exported selection, open your Web browser, select File > Open, browse to the location of the exported files, and open the main HTML page.
Prior to saving an Excel file to HTML format, turn off Excels password protect feature. Formulas are saved as sheet references in Excel. When an Excel workbook is saved to HTML workbook, formulas linked to a cell in the HTML workbook do not operate. Custom view and scenarios can only be used in Excel. Add-ins and templates are only available in Excel.
70
Diagonal lines, ovals, round rectangles, and dotted or dashed lines do not export to the Web page. Overline or double-overline text is displayed as regular text. The Netscape browser shows data formatted with bold Arial 8 pt. as regular Arial 8 pt. Data formatted with Arial 14 pt. is displayed smaller in Interactive Reporting Studio and Netscape than in Microsoft Word and Internet Explorer. Border properties (including color properties) are supported in Microsoft Internet Explorer, but not in Netscape. Consequently, border properties for the Results, Table, and Pivot sections are not displayed on Web pages opened with Netscape. If you embed a Results, Table, or Pivot section in a report, Netscape does recognizes the border properties. Raised and sunken borders are displayed as regular borders. Lines and rectangles are not displayed in reports in UNIX browsers. The right border of a table embedded in a report sometimes is displayed thicker in Netscape. The Picture Tile property is not supported by HTML. Word-wrapped fields contain hard-coded leading spaces for left padding. HTML permits the browser to implement word-wrap, but eliminates extraneous space. In addition, a browser word-wrap feature does not break a word in the middle of a word regardless of its length. When empty table cells are displayed with a certain font, it is because Interactive Reporting Studio inserts a single blank into each empty cell. HTML requires a single value in each empty cell. HTML does not recognize vertical text.
To use the Export to HTML Wizard, select File > Export > HTML Wizard.
71
Exporting SQL
Use the Export SQL command to export the SQL statement for your query. The file is saved in an SQL format.
To export SQL:
1 Select File > Export > SQL.
The Export SQL File dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the file name and location, and then click Save.
Printing Documents
Interactive Reporting StudioWeb client printing functions are available for most document sections. You can specify the page setup for your printer, print directly to a printer, or preview a print job onscreen.
Page Setup
Use the Page Setup command to specify the default printer for theInteractive Reporting StudioWeb client document and to define default page properties for that printer.
Print Preview
Use the Print Preview command to view onscreen a representation of the printed version of a finished report. The Print Preview command is available for all sections except the Dashboard. In the Report Designer section, the page view of the report is a direct representation of the printed report.
72
To preview a section before sending it to a printer, select File > Print Preview.
A preview of the current section is displayed in the Content pane, and a Print Preview menu is added to the Main menu. Use the commands on the Print Preview menu to navigate through the preview pages and to specify starting page numbers.
Print
Use the Print command to print the information displayed in the Content pane of most sections.
Sending Documents
You can attach documents to your electronic mail (email) if you have a MAPI-compliant email system such as Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange.
To email a document:
1 Select File > Send.
The Mail Document window is displayed.
3 Select whether to copy other recipients or include additional remarks, then click Send It.
73
74
Description Saves the active document Opens the Save As dialog box. Allows you to specify save options for the active document. Imports data stored in Microsoft Excel, tab-delimited, or comma-delimited file formats to the Results section for analysis and reporting. Exports data to the selected format.
Opens the Print Setup dialog box. Toggles Print Preview mode and the Print Preview menu. Displays a preview of the current section in the Content pane. Prints the information displayed in the Content pane. [Ctrl+P]
Edit Menu Commands Keyboard Shortcut [Ctrl+Z] [Ctrl+Y] [Ctrl+X] [Ctrl+C] [Ctrl+V] Shortcut Menu
Description Reverses the last command issued. Re-applies the actions or commands on which you have used the Undo command. Cuts the selected item. Copies the selected item. Paste the last copied item.
75
Table 4
Command Clear Select All Delete Section Rename Section Duplicate Section
Description Clears entry fields in dialog boxes. Select all items or elements, depending on the location of the cursor. Opens the Delete Section dialog box. Opens the Section Label dialog box. Duplicates the selected section and adds the copy to the Section pane with a sequenced number appended to the section name.
[Ctrl+A]
Command Section/Catalog Section Title Bar Toolbars Status Bar Console Window Go To Section Hide Section Unhide Section Query Log Zoom Hide Request Item
Description Toggles the display of the Section and Catalog panes. Toggles the display of the Section title bar. Toggles the display of the Standard, Format, and Section toolbars. Toggles the display of the Status bar. Opens the Console window, which is used to display error messages and alert values generated by the JavaScript interpreter. Navigates to the section selected from the list of sections in the current document. Hides the active section. Opens the Unhide Section dialog box which lists currently hidden sections. Opens the Query Log dialog box, which displays the command language statement for the active query. Changes the display of the active section to the selected zoom setting. Hides the selected Request item from view.
76
Table 5
Description Opens the Unhide Columns dialog box, which lists currently hidden Request items. Opens the Custom SQL window where you can edit the SQL statement for a query. Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected topic or topic item.
Insert Menu Commands Description Inserts a new Query section. Inserts a new OLAPQuery section. Inserts a new Table section. Inserts a new Pivot section. Inserts a new Chart section. Inserts a new Report section. Inserts a new Dashboard section. Inserts a page header that is used when the section is printed. Inserts a page footer that is used when the section is printed.
Command New Query New OLAP Query New Table New Pivot New Chart New Report New Dashboard Page Header Page Footer
Note: See Formatting Numeric Data Types on page 79 for detailed information on adding document sections and customizing the headers and footers in the document sections.
77
Description Opens the Font page of the Properties dialog box. Select between Plain, Bold, Italics, Underline, Overline, Double Underline. Opens the Number page of the Properties dialog box. Select between Left, Center, Right and Top, Middle, Bottom. By default, Results columns are evenly sized without regard to the length of data values. Numeric data that does not fit is replaced with pound signs (#). To manually resize a column, drag the right edge of the column to a new position.
Row
Resizes all rows to the standard row height. To resize all rows in a table, drag the bottom edge of a row to a new position. All rows in the table are resized.
Column Titles Row Numbers Text Wrap Suppress Duplicates Grid Lines Border and Background Spotlighter Export Properties
Toggles the display of column titles. Toggles the display of row numbers. Row numbers are printed on reports, but are not copied to the clipboard or exported to a file. Wraps text in a column. Suppresses duplicate values in a column. Use this feature if you want to display only the first instance of a duplicate value when individual database records include redundant information. Opens the Gridlines page of the Properties dialog box. Opens the Border and Background page of the Properties dialog box. Opens the Spotlight dialog box. Use to spotlight important values. Opens the Export Properties dialog box. Use to set the number of rows that should be included on an HTML page before the data breaks to another page, and to export data that does not contain any quote to a tab-delimited text file.
78
Tip: To automatically size all columns so that the column width fits its contents, press
[Ctrl+A] [Ctrl+E].
Note: See Formatting Numeric Data Types on page 79 for detailed information on working with document sections.
Select an object, right-click to access the Number shortcut menu, and select a numeric formatting option from the menu. Use the buttons on the right-hand side of the Formatting toolbar.
The scientific notation format is displayed using the appropriate decimal separator for the current local. (The above example uses a period as the decimal separator.) Table 8 describes the acceptable variations on the default scientific notation format:
Table 8
Variations on the Default Scientific Notation Format Description For example, 0.00000E+000 displays six digits of precision.
Used after the decimal point to suppress zeros. For example, the value .000179 with the format 0.00000E-00 displays as 1.79000E-04. With the format 0.0####E-00, the same value displays as 1.79E-04.
Controls the case in which the exponent designator displays. If the plus sign is used, the exponential component always displays with a sign (plus or minus). If the minus sign or no sign is used, the sign displays only when negative.
79
Table 8
Variations on the Default Scientific Notation Format (Continued) Description The number of zeros following the E or e, with or without a sign character, is the minimum number of digits to display for the exponent. For example, the value 179 displays as 1.79E2 with the format 0.00E0 and as 1.79e002 with the format 0.00e000. If the minimum number of digits is not adequate to represent the magnitude of the number, additional digits are added as required. For example, the value 1,789,000,000,000 with the format 0.00E0 displays as 1.79E12.
Leading + or sign
A leading minus sign (or no sign character) displays a sign only if the precision of the number is negative. The appropriate sign always displays if the plus character leads the string.
Note: You cannot apply scientific notation to non-numeric data types. If you try to do so, the formatting remains the same.
Numeric Formatting Options Description Currency Applies currency formatting to the selected numeric object(s). The currency formatting applied is the first currency type for the selected locale specified in the BQFORMAT.INI file. To display all the available currency types for the current local, click the arrow to the right of the Currency button. Note: The Currency button is ignored if the selected object is not of a numeric type (real or integer). Percentage Applies percentage formatting to the selected numeric object(s). The percentage formatting applied is the first percentage format for the selected locale specified in the BQFORMAT.INI file. To display all the available percentage formats for the current local, click the arrow to the right of the Percentage button. Note: The Percentage button is ignored if the selected object is not of a numeric type (real or integer). Comma Formatting Toggles the presence of the thousands-separator character on or off. If on, comma formatting inserts the thousands-separator character into the current format string for the selected object. The thousands-separator character is inserted based on current locale settings. Note: Comma formatting does not affect numbers formatted with scientific notation.
Button
80
Table 9
Numeric Formatting Options (Continued) Description Decimal Increase Increases the number of displayed digits after the decimal point (or its locale-specific equivalent). For example, if the current format for the field specifies three decimal digits, such as $#.000, pressing Decimal Increase modifies the format to $#.0000. Pressing Decimal Increase when the number of decimal positions is zero adds the decimal separator character in addition to the one decimal digit. For example, if the format is ##%, pressing Decimal Increase changes the format to ##.0%. Note: The Decimal Increase button is ignored if the selected object is not of a numeric type (real or integer). Decimal Decrease Decreases the number of displayed digits after the decimal point (or its locale-specific equivalent). For example, if the current format for the field specifies three decimal digits, such as $#.000, pressing Decimal Decrease modifies the format to $#.00. If the number of decimal positions goes from one to zero when pressing Decimal Decrease, the decimal separator is no longer part of the format. Pressing Decimal Decrease when the number of decimal positions is already at zero results in no action. Note: The Decimal Decrease button is ignored if the selected object is not of a numeric type (real or integer).
Button
Understanding Document Sections Adding Sections Viewing Sections Moving Between Sections Duplicating Sections Renaming Sections Adding Headers and Footers to Sections Deleting Sections
81
Each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations. You can move back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your result data. You can also position sections side-by-side in multiple windows. To see a graphical representation of a document section, click the desired section name in the Section pane. Figure 1 shows some example document sections displayed in the Section pane.
Figure 1
Adding Sections
To insert a new section in a document, select Insert > New Section.
For example, to insert a new Chart, select Insert > Chart, to insert a new Table, select Insert > Table. inserts the new section and adds a new section label to the Section pane. The section label is based on the type of section added. A sequence number is added to the section label if a section with the same name already exists.
Viewing Sections
You can hide sections to simplify your view of the workspace. This allows you to concentrate on only those sections in which you want to work.
To hide a section:
1 In the Section pane, select the section that you want to hide. 2 Select View > Hide Section.
82
2 Select the hidden section that you want to view and click OK.
The section is displayed in the Section pane.
Select the desired section in the Section pane. Click the arrow keys on the Section title bar. Select View > Go To Section > Section.
Duplicating Sections
You can copy Query, OLAPQuery, Chart, Pivot and Dashboard sections if the Duplicatable feature is selected.
To make a section duplicatable, select the section label in the Section pane and select Edit >
Duplicatable.
To duplicate a section, select the section label in the Section pane and select Edit > Duplicate
Section. Interactive Reporting duplicates the section and adds a new section label to the Section pane. The new section label is based on the original section label, but a sequence number is appended to the label. For example, if you duplicate a section named SalesChart three times, the Section pane would show: SalesChart, SalesChart2, SalesChart3, and SalesChart4.
Renaming Sections
The first section that you create is given the default section name, for example, Results. When you insert new sections of the same type as those that already exist, they are numbered sequentially, for example, Results2. To assign sections different or unique names based on your application, use the Rename command.
To rename a section:
1 In the Section pane, select the section label. 2 Select Edit > Rename.
83
You can also click Rename Section on the shortcut menu, or double-click the desired section. The Section Label dialog box is displayed.
Date Time File Name Page Number Page Total Limits Applied in the Query
3 Enter the desired text or use the buttons in the dialog box to add current date, time, file name, page, page
total, or limit values and click OK.
The Interactive Reporting StudioThe Web client adds the new header or footer to your report. You can change the font properties and alignment of headers and footers, but you cannot add color.
84
Deleting Sections
You can delete a section, but do so with care. Some sections are dependent on other sections. Deleting one section could also delete one or more sections that you did not want to delete. Note that you cannot restore a deleted section.
To delete a section:
1 In the Section pane, select the section label. 2 Select Edit > Delete Section.
You can also select the section and click Delete Section on the shortcut menu. The Remove Section dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Remove.
85
Setting Options
The Tools menu provides commands that allow you to manage various Interactive Reporting Studio options, such as job processing options, connections, default formats, and program options. Review the following sections for information on:
Note: See Tools Menu Command Reference on page 93 for an overview of all the Tools menu commands.
2 Click the tab for the section whose fonts and styles you want to change.
86
3 Make the desired default font, size, style, and alignment settings and click OK.
To restore the default settings, click Defaults.
Default Number Formats Description Sets the locale or country associated with the default format that you want to use. The locale that you select determines the available number, date, and currency formats. Sets the default date format. Sets the default time and date format. Sets the default time format. Sets the default month format for the month used in Add Date Groups. Sets the default format for null values. Null values are empty values for which no data exists. Null values are not equal to zero.
Field Select a Formatting Locale Date Timestamp Time Month (For Add Date Groups) Null
Real Integer
Sets the default format for real values. Sets the default format for integer values.
Table 11 lists the numeric field options and definitions along with examples.
Table 11
Number Field Descriptions Description Integer placeholder or zero value. If a number has an integer value in this position relative to the decimal point, the integer is displayed. Otherwise, a zero is displayed. Integer placeholder. If a number has an integer value in this position relative to the decimal point, the integer is displayed. Otherwise, nothing is displayed. Formats with parenthesis options display negative values in parentheses. Otherwise, negative values display with a minus sign. A semicolon operates as a separator between two number formats. The semicolon separates a positive integer and a negative integer. Examples Apply 0 to show 123 Apply 0.00 to show 123.45 Apply #,##0 to show 1,234
Option 0
()
Apply #, ##0;(#,##0) to show 1, 234 or apply (1, 234) for a negative number
Setting Options
87
Table 11
Number Field Descriptions (Continued) Description Adds the respective character to numeric values in the same position relative to the decimal point. Displays month, day, and year in respective positions for date-coded information. Adds the respective character to date-coded values in the same position relative to variables. Displays hour, minute, and second in respective positions for date-coded information. Adds the respective character to time-coded values in the same position relative to variables. Examples Apply $#,##0.00 to show $1,234.56 Apply 0% to show 3% Apply mm dd yy to show 05 07 99 Apply mm/dd/yy to show 06/23/99 Apply HH:MM:SS to show 17:45:10 Apply HH:MM:SS AM to show 17:45:10 AM
Option $ %
m d yy -/ HH MM SS : AM PM
General Options
Use the General tab to globally enable or disable specific operating functions.
Reset Print Properties Retains the print settings with each section of the document, instead of inheriting the current default print settings.
88
Use Microsoft Windows Colors and Styles Specifies the colors and styles scheme used in the Interactive Reporting Studio, or the Interactive Reporting Web Client. The selection in this field updates s a UseSystemColors registry key setting in either the Designer or plug in folder of the registry. Enable this field o use legacy colors and styles based on Microsoft Windows. Disable this field to use Workspace colors and styles. Before the setting in this field can take effect, the application must be closed and restarted. Compress All Documents Specifies that the Interactive Reporting Studio save all documents in compressed file format. This reverses the default setting, which saves documents without compression. If enabled, you can override this privilege and save documents without compression by choosing File > Save As and changing the Save As type. Create New Documents Compressed Specifies that the Interactive Reporting Studio only compress new documents. Always Prompt For Owner Name Requires Interactive Reporting Studio to prompt for an owner name of job scheduling repository tables whenever you schedule a document. Enable this feature if you schedule documents to more than one repository. When A Two Digit Year Is Entered, Interpret As A Year Between By default, if you enter a date and type only two digits for the year, the Interactive Reporting Studio handles the dates as follows:
Two-digit years entered from 00 up to and including 29 are assigned to the 21st century (2000 to 2029). For example, if you enter 3/12/18, the Interactive Reporting Studio accepts the date as March 12, 2018. Two-digit years entered from 30 up to and including 99 are assigned to the 20th century (1930 to 1999). For example, if you enter 3/12/96, the Interactive Reporting Studio accepts the date as March 12, 1996.
You can change the default century to which a two-digit year is assigned by using the datehandling boxes. These boxes require a range of dates within a 99-year time period. Changes to a date format are applied globally, but do not affect dates previously formatted. For example, if you want the two-digit year 25 to be assigned to the twentieth century instead of the twenty-first century use the arrow keys to scroll to the year 1999. The date in the corresponding read-only date-handling box is automatically changed to 1900.
Tip: Whenever possible, enter the year as four digits; that is, type 2001 instead of 01.
File Locations
Use the File Locations tab to specify the default locations for Interactive Reporting Studio documents and other necessary files.
Setting Options
89
Documents Directory The default directory where you want to save Interactive Reporting Studio documents when the Save File dialog box is displayed. Interactive Reporting Studio documents are saved in the default directory with a .bqy extension. Connections Directory A directory that contains the Interactive Reporting connection files used to connect to databases. The default Connections directory is C:\hyperion\BIPlus\data\Open Catalog Extensions. Default Connection The Interactive Reporting connection used when no connection is specified, such as when you click the connection icon in a new document file. Preferred Repository Connection The repository connection file you want the user to see in the Open Repository Connection drop-down list. HTML Template Directory The directory of HTML templates used with the HTML Export Wizard.
OLAP Options
Use the OLAP tab to haveInteractive Reporting automatically create a Results section when you click Process to process your OLAPQuery
2 Click the OLAP tab. 3 Define the desired options and click OK.
Auto-Generate Results Section When Processing an OLAP Query Interactive Reporting automatically creates a Results section for any future OLAPQuery section when that OLAPQuery section is first processed.
Document Properties
The Document Properties tabs are used to describe information about an Interactive Reporting document, such as in which application the document was created and also the server address associated with a document. Document properties consist of the General tab and the Server tab.
90
Document Path Displays the path name to which the document has been saved. Application Name Displays the application name in which the document was created. Application names include:
Interactive Reporting Studio Interactive Reporting Web Client Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace Interactive Reporting Job SmartView
Application Version Displays the release version in which the document was created. Date Displays the date on which the document was created.
The following Modified display fields for the document are shown on the General Document Properties dialog:
Document Path Displays the path name to which the modified document was saved. Application Name Displays the application name in which the document was last modified. Application names include:
Interactive Reporting Studio Interactive Reporting Web Client Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace Interactive Reporting Job SmartView
Application Version Displays the release version in which the document was last modified. Date Displays the date on which the document was last modified.
Setting Options
91
To specify a server address for a document, enter the URL address in the Server Address field
and click OK. The URL address must be in the following format: http://<server>/workspace/dataaccess.
Customizing Menus
You can use JavaScript to customize Interactive Reporting Studio menus. Add scripted menu items to the menu bar to:
Run commonly used scripts Launch separate applications Export sections to a different file format with a single click
Note: Since version 6.0, JavaScript is used as the script-editing tool instead of the Interactive Reporting scripting language. Script written prior to version 6.0 is still recognized, but is enclosed in a wrapper and called with a JavaScript command.
2 Type the name of your custom menu in the Menu Name field. 3 Click Add to add a new menu item to the Menu Items list.
The Properties dialog box is displayed and shows the Text page.
92
7 Click OK when you are finished to close the Customize dialog box. 8 To provide the same functionality for distributed users, copy the preference file which supports this feature
to users machines.
For Windows, the bqtools.ini file is located in the Windows directory. For UNIX, the .bqtools.ini file is located in the user home directory
Description Processes the current query, all queries in the document, or a customized selection of queries. Allows you to select, log on, log out, modify, or create a connection. Opens the Connections Manager dialog box. Saves a connection file with a Interactive Reporting Studio document.
Shortcut
[F11]
Setting Options
93
Table 12
Description Opens the Administer Repository dialog box, where you can modify object descriptions or groups. Shows run time and status details for each job submitted to a job repository. Allows you to set default formats or program options. Opens the Customize dialog box where you can add customized menus or menu items.
Shortcut
94
the URL of the server, launches the zero administration page, and performs the upgrade. The Interactive Reporting Web Client is opened from the disk using file name in the upgraded version. If a BQY was created in previous versions of the Interactive Reporting Web Client or in the Designer, the user is prompted for the version to use. The user can select from a list of versions of the Interactive Reporting Web Client, including the 6.x version. If the user selects a 6.x version, then no version record is attached to the document because there is no command on the Tools menu to open the document in another version of the Interactive Reporting Web Client. After the Interactive Reporting Web Client is launched, the user can change the Interactive Reporting Web Client designated to open the document at any time by selecting the following options from the Tools menu:
Change Web Client version to open this file Make this Web Client default for locally saved BQY files.
95
96
Chapter
4
This chapter explains how to use Interactive Reporting Studio to connect to and query a relational database.
In This Chapter Query Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Building Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Processing Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Saving Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Cancelling Queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Building Subqueries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Derived Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Working with Query Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
97
Query Section
The Query section is the foundation of any Interactive Reporting Studio document and is automatically created (along with its complementary Results section) whenever you open a new document. It provides an intuitive interface to a relational database serverdatabase server. The Query section is the Interactive Reporting interface with databases. In the Query Contents pane, you can examine the overall informational contents of the database, and even look underneath to verify the actual data values. The Query section contains a Data Model possibly a query. Some Data Models are locked, and only allow you to process the existing query; others allow you to make modifications to the query or build a new one. You can also apply filters, compute and modify items, and process your request for information. An Interactive Reporting document can contain multiple Query sections. These query sections can access a wide range of data sources (relational databases, OLAP servers, imported data sets, and local joins). Each Query section has its own Results section and can be associated with the same database or different databases (that is, the connection file or data model used is independently defined in each query).
To view the database tables in the Table catalog, select DataModel > Table Catalog.
The Table catalog in the Catalog pane expands to show all of the tables in the database. If you are not connected to a database, Interactive Reporting Studio prompt you for your user name and password.
To create a data model, in the Catalog pane, select a table from the Table catalog, and select
Query > Add Request Item(s).
Building Queries
You build queries by adding topics from the data model in the Content pane to the Request line.
98
Drag an item from the Content pane to the Request line. Select an item in the Content pane and select Query > Add Request Item(s).
To add an entire column from a table to the Request line, select the table header. You also can select more than one of the same item (to create duplicate items). If you add more items than the Request line can display, use the arrow buttons at the right of the Request line to scroll through the requested items, or resize the Request line to display multiple rows of request columns.
To reorder items on the Request line, select the item to be moved and drag it to a new location
on the Request line.
To remove an item from the Request line, select the desired item and complete one of the
following actions:
Click the Delete button on the standard toolbar. Click Remove on the shortcut menu. Press the Delete key.
If you have not yet processed the query, Interactive Reporting Studio removes the item from the Request line. If you have previously processed the query, you are informed that your results no longer match the items requested.
Caution! Remove items with caution as a computed item or report may draw data from the item you
delete.
Building Queries
99
Select the item and click Hide on the shortcut menu. Select the item and choose View > Hide Request Items.
Click in the Request line and click Unhide on the shortcut menu. Select View > Unhide Request Items.
Processing Queries
After you build your query and apply filters, computations, sorts, and any other adjustments to further refine your request, you need to process it. Processing your query may take a few moments if your query is complex or if the data in linked report sections needs to be refreshed. When you process your query, the data is retrieved to the Results section in tabular form. You can reprocess your query at any time and in any section to refresh the data. You can also return to the Query section from any other section at any time to alter the query and reprocess it.
Click the Process button on the standard toolbar. (Click the right-arrow to select a process option.) Select Tools > Process Query and select the desired process option.
Since a document can contain multiple queries, there are three processing options on the Process drop-down list:
100
Process Current Processes the current object. In some cases more than one query may be processed, for example, if a report references results sets from multiple queries. Process Current is the default selection when using the toolbar button. Process All Processes all the queries in the document. By default, queries are processed in the order in which they are displayed in the Section catalog. For example, in a document with three queries, Query1, Query2, and Query3, the queries are executed in that order when you select Process All. (Query Processing Order on page 101). Process Custom Opens the Process Custom dialog box so that you can indicate which queries to process by selecting a querys check box.
The query is sent to the database and retrieved data is displayed in the Results section. While the data is being retrieved, the Status bar displays a dynamic row count indicating rate and progress of server data processing and network transfer.
Processing Queries
101
2 Select a query section and then move it up or down in the processing order using the arrow keys to the
right.
3 Double click a query section to remove it from the processing order or add it back and click OK..
Only queries marked with an asterisk (*) are processed during Process All.
Saving Queries
After you process a query, your data is available until you close the document. Saving your document saves the current formatting and layout of all sections in the document.
Cancelling Queries
To cancel a query, both Interactive Reporting and the database must communicate properly for reasons other than running a query.
To cancel a query, press and hold [Alt+End] until the query is cancelled.
The database connection used to connect to the database must use an Asynchronous API. This is the default configuration, but it can be turned off on some databases. If the Asynchronous API s disabled, the database cannot detect a new request until the query has finished processing. The database must pause every so often even when processing a query. As a default configuration, many databases are not set up to pause, which could result in the database being too busy to hear the cancel request until the query has finished processing.
102
Building Subqueries
You can use subqueries to filter your data. A subquery answers a specific question or provides specific information within the context of a main query, also called a parent statement. The database evaluates the entire query by first analyzing the subquery. The parent statement then filters its rows based on the rows retrieved by the subquery. Interactive Reporting Studio uses two types of subqueries: regular and correlated. Review the following topics for information on: Regular Subqueries Correlated Subqueries
Regular Subqueries
A regular subquery executes the inner and outer queries once and returns the values from the inner query to the outer query. For example, you might need to find out who sold more than the average of all sales representatives in April. You first use a subquery to define what was the average sales amount in April. This information is supplied to the parent query, which then determines which representatives exceeded the average of all sales in April.
Double-click the topic item Drag the item from the Content pane to the filter line Right-click and item and select filter on the shortcut menu.
3 Click Advanced.
The Advanced button toggles the Create Subquery button.
Building Subqueries
103
6 In the Section pane, click the parent query for the subquery.
The parent query section is redisplayed.
Correlated Subqueries
A correlated subquery is related to a regular subquery in that it uses an inner query to feed result values to the outer query. A correlated subquery executes the outer query multiple times, once for each row returned by the inner query; it is processed by joining a column in the subquery to a column in the parent query. For example, suppose you had to identify which sales representatives had more sales in the current month than they did in the previous month. The correlated subquery is executed for each row of sales information in the parent query to first determine what were the sales for each representative in the previous month. This data, in turn, is compared to sales for each representative in the current month, and only those representatives whose sales in the current month were greater that their previous months sales are returned.
104
Double-click the topic item Drag the item from the Content pane to the Filter line Right-click and item and select Filter on the shortcut menu.
3 Click Advanced.
The Advanced button toggles the Create Subquery button.
6 If the parent query you want to work with is not displayed in the Catalog pane, select Show Queries from
the shortcut menu in the Section pane.
8 Drag the topic item you want to correlate by into the blank parent query topic.
The Select Correlation Column dialog box is displayed and shows the tables of the parent query.
9 Use the + and signs to navigate through the structure of the directory tree. 10 Select the column in the parent to which you want to join the subquery topic item and click OK.
The topic item is added to the Filter line and a join line is drawn.
Building Subqueries
105
Derived Tables
A derived table is essentially a statement-local temporary table created by means of a subquery in the FROM clause of a SQL SELECT statement. It exists only in memory and behaves like a standard view or table. For example, assume an Oracle 9i database table is called state_table and has the following row values in the state column.
State CA CA CA FL
If you used the following inner SELECT statement which includes a derived table to evaluate the state_table, you could return the count and percentage of each state. The SQL has been written for Oracle 9i.
select state, count(state) as State_Count, (count(state)/derived_table.tot_state_count) as State_Percentage from state_table, (select count(state) tot_state_count from state) derived_table group by state, derived_table.tot_state_count;
State CA FL
State_Count 3 1
Derived tables are useful when you need to generate aggregates in a table that would otherwise contain dimension type data and join the resulting aggregate with detail level facts in another table. Additionally, the aggregate values in the derived tables can be used in the outer query's WHERE clause (i.e., "where salary > average_salary", average_salary has been derived by the subquery). These tables can also optimize a query's performance in some circumstances, such as minimizing sorting when some DISTINCT values are needed from some tables but not all. Finally, it might eliminate the need in some cases, to build "local results" queries. This feature enables users to access this type of SQL construct in an easy-to-build manner.
106
A Derived Table cannot be iconized. A Derived Table only has two speed menu options: Add Selected Items and Remove. When you modify a Query section that is used as a Derived Table, note the following:
Derived tables are available for connections to Teradata, DB2, Oracle, and Microsoft SQL Server. If you use the feature when you build a query, an active connection is required if the server code is ODBC or OLEDB so that the smart ODBC can determine the database type. Interactive Reporting Studio Designer, Explorer versions and the Interactive Reporting Web Client all can use this feature. Scripts in documents opened with the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace can also use this feature. If you remove all items from the Request line, the topic are displayed empty (there are no columns) in the section(s) where they are used as a derived query. If the columns referenced by the deriving Query section are removed from the Request line, the effect is the same as if a sync with database had found the column removed. If you rename items in a Query section used as a derived table, you must ensure that the new name is a valid name for the database in use. These names are used during the SQL generation, and are quoted if quoted identifiers are selected in the database connection. Items from Local Results collection cannot be added to the Query. The icon used for a derived table in the Table Catalog tree is shown on the left. Both the referencing query and the derived table query must use the same data source even if one or the other is not connected. For example, assume Query1 is built from DataModel1, and Query2 is a query section not derived from a DataModel section. That is, you must be sure that both Query1 and Query2 can connect to the same data source name (such as an ODBC data source name or an Oracle TNS name), and they share the same API and server codes. The data source name alone may not be sufficient since two names can be identical over two different APIs. However, it is not required that the connections use the same database credentials. You do have to ensure that the referenced tables are accessible from whatever logon is used in all selected Query sections. Interactive Reporting Web Client users need at least a Query role to use derived tables in an existing data model, or data model role to add or remove them from the data model.
Derived Tables
107
3 Build the Derived Table query by clicking anywhere in the Catalog pane and selecting Derivable Queries
on the shortcut menu.
The Derivable Queries option is not displayed if no existing query sections can be used in the current query. (The Table Catalog below shows the Derivable Queries tree expanded and the Tables tree contracted. Local Results only are displayed when a user has requested them from the speed menu.)
The only queries that are displayed in this list are those that:
have the same connection information as the current Query section have at least one item on the Request line do not use local joins do not also contain derived table topics (that is, derived tables are not nestable)
The topic name, when a derived table is added to the workspace, is the same as the Query section name, and the column names are the same as the names of the items on the Request line in the Query section being added with the exception of any (data) function component. In cases where the function is displayed on the Request line, then the resulting topic item name would be the same as the name that is displayed in Results after processing the query. The following diagram illustrates how the Request line for Query2 are displayed as a topic in another Query section:
4 Create a manual join by dragging an item from at least one topic to another, including to/from the added
derivable query sections.
Once the derived table becomes a topic, items from it can be added to the Request, Filter, or Sort lines of the containing query. It can be referenced in computed item dialogs, and can be used in custom GROUP BY logic. If you use the Show Values feature when setting a filter on an item in the derived table, the SQL that would be used is the same as if you set a filter on the same column in the source Query section.
108
You can process the query by way of Process command when viewing the query section (or one of its dependent sections) or by checking it in the Process Custom dialog. The Process All command process the query containing the derived table. It also processes the query section from which the derived table is derived, unless it explicitly removed using the Query Processing Order dialog (which is recommended to avoid duplication of processing at the database.) Additions to the Request line of the source Query are reflected in the topic item list of the referencing Query section the next time it is displayed. Once a Query section has been added to another Query or Data Model workspace, changes to the source query section will check for dependencies and warn you of any discrepancies that might occur. For example, you would receive a warning if you removed an item from the source querys Request line which is used someplace else (Request, Filter, Sort, etc.) in a Query that is deriving a table from the source query.
Custom SQL
If t you open the Custom SQL window in a query that has a derived table topic, then the SQL for the derived table is shown in the custom SQL window as part of the overall query. At this point, the SQL is locked; changes in the source query section for the derived table are not reflected in this SQL until such time as the user presses the Reset button. Further more, when you process the query with the Custom SQL window open, it is executed as is.
Generates the SQL for the Query section being used as a topic in the current Query section being processed, including resolving any variable filters. Any Sort line items in the source Query section are ignored in generating the SQL. This generation only occurs if the contents of the Query as a topic is referenced by the currently processing Query section, following the rules for join path generation specified for the currently processing section. The resulting SQL is added to the currently processing Query section if required, in the FROM clause, surrounded by parentheses, as with any subquery.
Derived Tables
109
The entire subquery is given a table alias. The alias will follow the pattern for any table involved in a query and will thus be of the form ALn. As with subquery filters, any aliases used in the subquery itself will be distinct from the alias names used in the currently processing Query sections table references. The alias will be used thereafter to refer to columns in the derived table, as is normal for SQL generation based on physical tables. Following the table alias name, ALn, a parenthesized list of column aliases is added. This list is identical to the list of names of the topic items in the Query topic. (For Oracle, the column aliases are displayed in the select list of the subquery instead of in a separate parenthesized list, for example, SELECT AL1.STORE AS store.) Before submitting the resulting SQL to the database, a check is performed to ensure that the query is properly joined. If it is not, the standard behavior, as specified by the database connection preference Allow Non-Joined Queries, is taken. Following submission of the SQL, any references to the column alias names on the Request line of the currently processing Query section are available to build the dependent Results section. The minimum requirement is that if the derived table is referenced by the currently processing query, then its SQL is generated as if that section were processed alone, with the exceptions noted above. At initial implementation or in a future release, the SQL would include only those columns actually needed by reference in the currently processing Query. This would reduce the number of items in the SELECT list of the subquery, with a corresponding reduction in the number of column alias names. For example, assume the following Query section is to be used as the source for a derived table in another Query section:
In this example, the computed items definition is UCASE (Pcw_Customers.Buyer). The filter on Store Type is set to Discount. The Query section using Query as a derived table might appear as follows: In the previous diagram, the filter on City is set to Los Angeles. The SQL generated when the above query is processed, per the minimum requirements, would be:
110
SELECT AL2.STATE, SUM(AL1.UNITS) FROM PCW_SALES AL1, (SELECT AL3.STORE_ID, AL3.CITY, AL3.STATE, UCASE(AL3.BUYER) FROM PCW_CUSTOMERS AL3 WHERE AL3.STORE_TYPE = Discount) AL2(STORE_ID, CITY, STATE, COMPUTED) WHERE AL2.STORE_ID = AL1.STORE_ID AND AL2.CITY = Los Angeles GROUP BY AL2.STATE
Processing Results to a Database Table Estimating Query Size Displaying Database Remarks Preaggregating Data Using Functions Appending Queries Using Local Results Using Stored Procedures Setting Query Options
You can accomplish these tasks by using the commands on the Query menu.
Note: See Query Menu Command Reference on page 122 for a complete list of the commands available on the Query menu.
111
Table Name Name of the new table you want to create or the name of an existing table to which you want to append columns. You can create tables under your own owner name or under different databases or owners. If you do not have the correct privileges or do not specify an alternate location, the table is created under your own owner name. Use the format DATABASE.OWNER.TABLENAME to specify alternate names.
Create Table Creates a new table in which Request items form columns. Append To Table Appends Request items as new columns in an existing table. Grant Access To Enables either everyone or specific users to access the new tables. Type PUBLIC or specific user IDs (separated by commas) for each user who should have access to the table. If not selected, access to the table is filtered to your own user ID.
3 Click OK.
The table is created or modified under the specified database and owner name.
To verify that the query was processed and the results saved as a database table:
1 Select DataModel > Table Catalog.
The Table Catalog expands in the Catalog pane.
[F9]
To delete tables you created using the Process To Database Table feature:
1 Select Query > Process Results To Table.
The Process Results to Database Table dialog box is displayed. Tables created under your user ID are displayed in the Tables Created By list.
112
To estimate the size of a query, select Query > Estimate Query Size.
queries the database and counts the number of records to retrieve if the query is processed. This process may take a while for server-intensive queries.
Select Query > Show Remarks. Click Show Remarks on the shortcut menu.
113
Table 13
Query Section Data Functions Description Returns unaggregated values as stored in the database. This is the default option in the Query section. Returns sum of underlying values. Returns average of underlying values. Returns lowest of underlying values. Returns highest of underlying values. Returns number of underlying values. Returns the number of distinct values in a column. This function is not supported by all database servers. Returns standard deviation of values. This function is not supported by all database servers. Returns variance of values. This function is available through Oracle servers only. Use for computing weighted items in pivot tables.
Data Function None Sum Average Minimum Maximum Count Count Distinct Standard Deviation Variance Weight
When using data functions, remember that with the exception of counts, data functions are applied almost entirely to numeric data items and the results are computed with respect to dimensional, nonnumeric items on the Request line, such as name and date items as in the following examples.
Example 1 Query 1 includes only items State and Units_Delivered. The data function Sum is applied and the
data returned consists of one row for each state with an aggregate sum for that state in the Units column.
Example 2 In Query 2, the item Fiscal_Year is added to Query 1, breaking out rows for each state/fiscal year
114
Example 3 In Query 3, the Product_Line Name has been included and the data function is changed to
Average. The number of rows increased, with data summarized as an average per state, per year, per product line.
The item is renamed to reflect the data function you selected. For example, SUM(Units) or AVG (Amount_Sold). When the Query is processed, the data is returned from the server in aggregate form.
115
Appending Queries
When you need to view and merge multiple queries in a combined Results set, there are four query operators that allow you to merge two or more separate queries. The operators and their functions are:
Union All distinct rows selected by either query are retrieved. No duplicate rows are retrieved. Union All All rows selected by either query, including duplicate rows, are retrieved. Intersection All distinct rows selected by both queries are retrieved. Except All distinct rows selected by the first query but not the second query, are retrieved. (Oracle database servers refer to the Except operator as Minus.)
Note:
If your database supports the Intersection and Except operators, but they are not available in the Operator dropdown list, check the Allow SQL-92 Advanced Set Operations connection preference.
The number of columns in the Select clause in both queries must be equal. The data type returned in the columns in both queries must match. For example, if Column 1 in the first query is a date, then Column 1 in the second query must also be a date.
Note: Items on the Union line can be repositioned to see the results of different intersections.
To append a query:
1 Verify data types and associated column(s).
This ensures that you know how to merge data in the second query.
4 Build the second query. 5 To merge multiple queries, select the operator you want to use from the Operator drop-down list. 6 Click Process.
You can have the Interactive Reporting generate automatically the join path required by the context of the query by using the automatic join path feature. This feature eliminates the need for you to predefine any join paths, since the Interactive Reporting determines the paths. When multiple paths are available, you are prompted for which one to use.
116
To use local results, click anywhere in the Catalog pane and select Local Results on the shortcut
menu. A Table catalog named Local Results is added to the Catalog pane.
Filters, computed items, data functions, or query properties to further analyze the dataset The following Query Options menu governors (disabled if only local results topics make up the Query):
Returning unique rows Row filter Time filter Auto-process Custom Group by
Query filters on Local Results Topic Items More than one Filter Local Join Filter Local Joins used with Local Joins Meta topics Access or change properties for Local Results Topic Items Append Query features of Unions or Intersections with Local Results Topic Items Process to table a query
Note: A query based on local result topics will not perform as well as the equivalent database query.
Processing Order
When using process all, the query producing the results may be processed twice if the query using its results are listed first in the section catalog. It is also possible for the query using the local results to use stale data if it was saved with results, and the query that produced them is reprocessed. To prevent this from happening, you can defined the order in which queries are processed. For more information, see Query Processing Order.
117
Note: The ODBC driver must recognize the ODBC syntax for calling procedures: {call <procedure name> (parameter list)}. If the procedure has no parameters, the parentheses surrounding the parameter list are optional. Interactive Reporting Studio does not insert empty parentheses in the call to execute the procedure. In addition, the driver must accept literal values for any specified parameter. Drivers that require parameter markers, for which values are provided when the procedure is executed, are not currently supported.
2 Select the database owner name that contains the stored procedure.
Any stored procedure to which you have been granted access is displayed in the Stored Procedures list.
2 If an argument dialog box is displayed, enter appropriate values as arguments to the stored procedure.
The arguments supplied are similar to variable filters. If necessary, see your database administrator for clarification on the arguments needed to process a particular stored procedure.
118
3 If the stored procedure queries the database, the database server returns data to the Results section and
the adds items to the Request line.
2 Select the desired restrictions for the current query and then click OK.
Return Unique Rows Eliminates duplicate rows from the data set retrieved by the query. It is not a regression. If the data source for a query is a local results table, even though this feature is enabled, the Unique Rows filter is not enforced. Return First ___ Rows Filters the number of database rows retrieved to the number entered. Time Filter ___ Minutes Filters the amount of time the query is allowed to run to the number entered. Seconds are entered as a decimal number. Time filters work for asynchronous database connections and cancel at the earliest opportunity for nonasynchronous connections. Auto Process Specifies the current query as a Standard Query to be processed automatically on download from the Repository (Designer only). Custom Group By Customizes the Group By criteria used to compute aggregate Request items, with selected items not factored into the grouping. This feature is available only when a data function is placed on a Request item.
119
3 Select the file that you want to import and click OK.
The data from the imported file is displayed in columnar Results Format.
2 Click Options and selected a datatype from the Datatype drop-down list. 3 Click OK.
The following table describes the supported data types:
120
Table 14
Supported Data Types Specification A data type is determined automatically given the data type of the reference items and the computations performed. Binary large object which is truncated at 64,000 bytes. Variable data type of length determined by a single byte of computer storage. Bytes can store numeric values from 0 to 255, or a single text character. Calendar date in server default format (typically mm/dd/yy). Retains a 16-bit value (2 bytes). A 16-bit integer stores integer values from 0 to 16,777,216, and signed integers between +8,388,608 and 8,388,608. Retains a 32-bit value (4 bytes). A 32-bit integer stores integer values from 0 to 4,294,967,296, and signed integers between +2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647. Character data (long text) exceeding 255 bytes (use the string data type for text strings up to 255 characters). The maximum long text retrieved is 4000; characters anything greater than that is silently truncated. Real numbers packed for use with EDA middleware. The results in the Interactive Reporting Studio are the same as real numbers. Decimal numbers up to 5 positions right of the decimal. Text strings to a maximum length of 256 characters. Interactive Reporting Studio supports very large character data type column fields, such as Microsoft SQL Server text data type files, and IBM's DB2 Character Large Object (CLOB) data types. The DB2 CLOB data type is SQL99-compliant and is used to store very large variable-length character strings (up to 10MB). Its length property is displayed with a default value of 4000 characters; however, this may be updated to any value between 1 and 9999 by an Interactive Reporting Studio user. The length property determines the maximum length of the CLOB data string that can be displayed after a database query. CLOB column fields with data that is greater that 9999 bytes in length are truncated after the 9999th character.
Data Type Automatic Blob Byte Date Integer (16-bit) Integer (32-bit) Long Text
Time TimeStamp
Time in format set by user preference. Date/time combination in format set by user preference.
121
Command Process Results To Table Estimate Query Size Show Remarks Add Request Item(s) Add Filter(s) Add Sort(s) Add Computed Item Data Functions Variable Filter
Description Allows you to create a table in the database to store your results set. Queries the database to see how many records your query will retrieve. Displays any remarks recorded about a topic or topic item. Adds the selected topic item to the Request line. Allows you to create a filter for the selected topic item. Adds the selected topic item to the Sort line. Allows you to add a new data item derived from server-side calculations performed on an existing topic item. Applies a prebuilt data function to the selected Request item. Designates the selected filter item as variable, which causes Interactive Reporting Studio to prompt the user for the filter values when the query is processed. Allows you to control access to the features on the Filter dialog box. Allows you to combine two or more queries in one Results set. Loads a stored procedure and displays it as a query object in the Content pane. Opens the Query Properties dialog box where you can specify options for rows returned, time filters, and so on.
[Ctrl+I]
[Ctrl+L]
122
Chapter Chapter
5
This chapter explains how to work with the results sets obtained from your relational database query or data import.
In This Chapter Results Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Enhancing Your Results Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Saving Results Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Exporting Result Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Results Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
123
Results Section
When you process a query or import data, Interactive Reporting retrieves data to your desktop and displays it in the Results section. Although the query may have accessed several different database tables, the results set is displayed as a single table. Each requested item is displayed as a column in the table and each database record is a row. The Status bar shows the date and time the results set for a particular Results section was last processed (or imported). Use the Results section to:
Verify that your query returned the correct information. Refine and extend the data set by applying filter conditions or create new computed or grouped items. Sort or use text and column formatting features to enhance the appearance of data results. Add summary totals or subtotals and compute them with data functions. Print or export the retrieved data to other applications.
All reports, including tables, pivots, charts, and those created using the Report Designer, are based on the data that is retrieved to the Results section.
124
Filtering Results Sorting Results Data Adding Computed Items to Results Applying Data Functions to Results Adding Grouping Columns Adding Columns Automatically Breaking Out Dates
Filtering Results
Local filters applied in the Results section enable you to temporarily screen out portions of data for reporting purposes, without eliminating then from the data set. Local filters are discussed in Server versus Local Filter Processing on page 268.
125
In the Results section, reference items are filtered to the items that is displayed on the Request line of the original query. Also, the scalar functions used to compute items are provided at the desktop level rather than the RDBMS. For more information about computed items, see Chapter 12, Working with Computed Items.
Break Total and Grand Total Data Functions Description Returns sum of underlying values. Returns average of underlying values. Returns lowest of underlying values. Returns highest of underlying values. Returns number of underlying values. Allows you to create a custom function using JavaScript.
2 Select a data function from the Grand Total Function drop-down list. 3 Select one or more columns to be totalled from the Add Grand Total To list and click OK.
The total and any subtotals in the column are computed to reflect the new data function.
126
1 Select a break column from the At Every Break drop-down list. 2 Select the data function you want to apply from the Break Total Function drop-down list. 3 Select one or more columns on which to display the break total and click OK.
3 Type a name for the new column in the Column Name field. 4 Create custom group values and link them to values in the base column.
Click New Groups to create groups and add them to the Groups list. Select a group in the Groups list; then, select items from the Available Values list and use the arrows to add them to the Items In Group list for the selected group. Remove selected values from a group by using the arrow to move them back to the Available Items list. Double-click a group name to modify it. Specify options for ungrouped values as follows:
Null Leaves the values ungrouped and unaggregated. Default Allows you to specify a default name to assign to all ungrouped values. Individual Group Assigns each ungrouped values the name originally assigned to it.
127
To modify a grouped column, select the grouped column and choose Results > Modify Column.
128
Deleting Columns
To delete a selected column from the Results table (and Data Layout), select Results > Remove.
If an item is removed from the Content pane, it is completely removed from the Data Layout and the data set.
Caution! Remove items with caution as computed items and other report sections may draw data values
Formatting Commands
You can use the commands available on the Format menu to change the appearance of fonts, backgrounds, borders, color, row heights, and column widths. For more information on formatting options, see Formatting Text and Other Elements on page 78. For detailed information on adding document sections and customizing the headers and footers in the document sections, see Formatting Numeric Data Types on page 79.
129
Saving results with your query allows you to analyze and generate reports without being connected to the database. Results are saved for an individual query or for multiple queries for which results have been generated. You also can specify whether to save any computed columns in the results set as a snapshot with the document.
Note: If you intend to work with a document that includes a Report Designer section, you must save results with the document. If you do not save results with the document, the Report Designer section is not available.
Saving your results set makes sense if you cannot connect to a database, for example, when traveling or working remotely, or if you are scheduling or forwarding documents for someone elses use.
2 Select the check box for the query results you want to save and decide whether to save computed columns
as snapshots, then click OK.
The query results and snapshots for computed columns that you selected are automatically saved the next time you save the document. Computed values saved as snapshots are not recalculated when the document is opened. Not even dynamic expressions (for example, values that reference the sysdate function such as date or time) are recalculated. They are recalculated only when the query is reprocessed. Documents that are saved with computed columns as snapshots tend to be larger in size than documents that do not contain shapshots, but they take less time to open. If you want to automatically recalculate the values of computed columns when a document is opened, do not select the corresponding results section in the Computed Columns list. The document file may take longer to open, especially if the results set contains a large number of computed columns or uses complex formulas in the definitions, since all computed values are recalculated in the Results section and in any other section that references the Results section. On the other hand, documents that do not contain snapshots tend to be smaller in size than documents that contain snapshots of computed columns. Table 18 lists the selection options and effects for saving query results and snapshots of computed columns with documents.
130
Table 18
Effects of Save Query Results with Document Options Save Computed Columns (as Snapshot) x What Happens Results are saved with the document and computed columns are saved as a snapshot. Computed columns are not recalculated when the document is opened. Values are recalculated only when the query is reprocessed. Results are saved with the document but computed columns are not saved as a snapshot. Computed columns are recalculated when the document is opened. Neither Results nor computed columns are saved with the document. Neither Results nor computed columns are saved with the document.
Note: You cannot save computed columns as snapshots unless you first save the corresponding query results.
131
Command Filter Sort Ascending Sort Descending Add Computed Item Add Grouping Column
Description Opens the Filter dialog box. Sorts the selected column values in ascending order (alphabetical or numeric). Sorts the selected column values in descending order (alphabetical or numeric). Opens the Insert Computed Item dialog box. Opens the Grouped Column dialog box. Use to merge dimension labels into new groupings and aggregate the associated data. Separates date-type items into year, quarter, and month items. Use to modify a computed column or a group column. Removes the selected column (or Data Layout item). Opens the Insert Break Total dialog box. Opens the Insert Grand Total dialog box. Hides the selected column from view. Opens the Unhide Column dialog box. Automatically adds columns in the Content pane for all requested items. If not selected, no columns are displayed in the Content pane. Turn this option off to manually add columns for requested items.
Add Date Groups Modify Column Remove Break Total Grand Total Hide Column Unhide Column AutoAdd Columns
[Ctrl+M] [Del]
132
Chapter
6
This chapter explains how to use tables to organize your data.
In This Chapter Table Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Creating Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Tables as a Data Staging Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Manipulating Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Working with Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Table Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
133
Table Section
A table is a columnar arrangement of data. Tables are used as building blocks in other reporting sections. A Table section functions is used in much the same way as the Results section. All of the commands that are available on the Results menu are also available on the Table menu. However, you cannot apply complex filters or aggregate data in the Table section. The data in a Table section is derived from the section that is active when you insert a new table. When you insert a Table section from the Results section, the new Table Section is attached to the Results section. This means any changes to the results set are propagated immediately to the Table section. You can also create additional tables, Pivot tables, Charts, and other reports form a dataset of a Table section just as you would from the Results section. Filters, computed columns, grouping columns, and other actions that modify the dataset of an active section set carry over to all tables and reporting sections built from that section.
Creating Tables
Use the Table Data Layout to construct, plot, and manage data.
2 Drag Results items from the Catalog pane to the Table Data Layout.
The populates automatically the table columns.
134
Filtering Data in a Table Sorting a Table Adding Computed Items Adding Grouping Columns Adding Date Groups Applying Data Functions to Tables
2 Select an arithmetic or logical operator from the drop-down list box. 3 Define the potential filter values by selecting one of the following options:
Show Values Shows column values associated with the item. Custom Values Supplies an empty field for inputting custom values. Select the check mark to add a value to the list.
4 In the Values list, select the values to include in the filter definition.
Individually select values or click Select All and deselect the values that you do not want to include.
5 When the values are highlighted in the values pane, click OK.
The filter is applied to the column and the column name is added to the Filter line.
135
To remove a filter in a table, select the filter item that you want to remove and choose Table >
Remove.
To remove a filter in a table, select the filter and do one of the following:
Click the Delete key. Select Table > Remove. Click Remove on the shortcut menu.
To remove all filters in a table, click Filter on the Filter line and select Table > Remove. To remove all filters in a table, click Filter on the Filter line and do one of the following:
Click the Delete key. Select Table > Remove. Click Remove on the shortcut menu.
Sorting a Table
You can sort the rows in a table by one or more columns in ascending or descending order. You can also apply sequenced, nested sorts to columns in the Table section.
To sort a column, select the column you want to sort and click the Sort button on the Standard
toolbar or select Table > Sort Ascending or Sort Descending.
4 Double-click specific sort items to toggle ascending and descending sort orders.
Ascending is the default sort order.
136
3 Define the new data item by building an expression in the Definition text box.
Use the operator buttons to insert arithmetic and logical operators at the insertion point.
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select Request items to place in the equation. Click Functions to apply scalar functions using the Functions dialog box.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace spaces in item names with underscores (_).
4 If necessary, click Options to set a new data type for the item. 5 When the equation is complete, click OK.
The computed item is added to the Data Layout and it is displayed as a column in the table.
137
For example, your company sales database may contain the items: State, Sales Region, and Country, which enable you to aggregate data on different levels in reports. However, suppose you are looking to track sales by subregion, or want to see data for one state versus an average for all other states combined. You can do this by grouping states together to create a subregion item or other custom dimension.
3 Type a name for the new column in the Column Name field. 4 Create custom group values and link them to values in the base column.
Click New Groups to create groups and add them to the Groups list. Select a group, and then select items from the Available Values list and use the arrows to add them to the Items In Group list for the selected group. Remove selected values from a group by using the arrow to move them back to the Available Items list. Double-click a group name to modify it. Specify options for ungrouped values as follows:
Column Name Names the new grouping column in the table. New Groups Creates a custom group to be displayed as a value in the new grouping column. Options Indicates how to represent unassigned values within the grouping column, that is, as null values, as members of a default group (named in the adjacent edit field), or as their own individual groups. Groups Selects a custom group to define by adding or removing items. Items In Group Removes an item from a selected custom group. Available Values Adds items to a selected custom group.
Select one of the following options to define the preferences for ungrouped columns:
Null Leaves the values ungrouped and disaggregated. Default Enables you to specify a default name to assign to all ungrouped values. Individual Group Assigns each ungrouped values the name originally assigned to it.
138
To modify a grouping column, select the grouping column and choose Table > Modify Column.
Break Total and Grand Total Data Functions Description Returns sum of underlying values. Returns average of underlying values. Returns lowest of underlying values. Returns highest of underlying values. Returns number of underlying values. Enables you to create a custom function using JavaScript.
139
Column Totals
To calculate a column total, select the column to be totaled and click the summation icon on
the Standard toolbar. Interactive Reporting adds a row labelled Total to the bottom of the table and displays the total as the last entry in the selected column.
Grand Totals
To apply a grand total to a column using a data function:
1 Select a column and select Table > Grand Total.
The Insert Grand Total dialog box is displayed.
2 Select a data function from the Grand Total Function drop-down list box. 3 Select one or more columns to be totaled from the Add Grand Total To list and click OK.
The total and any subtotals in the column are computed to reflect the new data function.
Break Totals
To apply a break total (subtotal):
1 Select a column and select Table > Break Total.
The Insert Break Total dialog box is displayed.
2 Select a break column from the At Every Break in drop-down list box. 3 Select the data function that you want to apply from the Break Total Function drop-down list box. 4 Select one or more columns on which to display the break total and click OK.
140
Deleting Columns
To delete a selected column from the Results table (and Data Layout), select Results > Remove.
If an item is removed from the Content pane, it is completely removed from the Data Layout and the data set.
Caution! Remove items with caution as computed items and other report sections may draw data values
Command Filter Sort Ascending Sort Descending Add Computed Item Add Grouping Column
Description Opens the Filter dialog box. Sorts the selected column values in ascending order (alphabetical or numeric). Sorts the selected column values in descending order (alphabetical or numeric). Opens the Insert Computed Item dialog box. Opens the Grouped Column dialog box. Use to merge dimension labels into new groupings and aggregate the associated data. Separates date-type items into year, quarter, and month items. Use to modify a computed column or a group column. Removes the selected column (or Data Layout item). Opens the Insert Break Total dialog box.
[Ctrl+M] [Del]
141
Table 21
Description Opens the Insert Grand Total dialog box. Hides the selected column from view. Opens the Unhide Column dialog box.
142
Chapter Chapter
7
In This Chapter
This chapter explains how to use Interactive Reporting Studio to connect to and query a multidimensional database.
OLAPQuery Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Defining OLAPQuery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Refining OLAPQuery Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Processing OLAP Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Applying Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Changing Data Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Formatting OLAPQuery Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Drilling Through from a Multi-Dimensional Database to a Relational Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 OLAP Menu Command Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
143
OLAPQuery Section
Use the OLAPQuery section to query multidimensional) or OLAP databases. When you connect to a multidimensional database, the document opens an OLAPQuery section. The user interface is similar to the Pivot section, except the OLAPQuery section displays the multidimensional database components as a hierarchical tree in the Catalog pane. These components include:
Dimensions categories of information, such as Location, Products, Stores, and Time. Dimensions are for informational use only and cannot be used as query items. (If a dimension contains multiple hierarchies, they will be represented under the dimension.)
Level(All)
Levels Groups of similar types of members. For example, using the members listed in a Location dimension, Japan, USA, and France belong to the Country level. San Francisco, Paris, Tokyo, and Rome belong to the City level. 35 Main Street belongs to the Address level. Hybrid (Analysis) Further dimensional data is present by way of Hybrid Analysis (the lowest levels of an Analytic Services or DB2 cube that can reside in a relational database, but are not reflected in the cube structure (metadata) that is resident on the Analytic Services Server itself). If a dimension has Hybrid Analysis data, the Analytic Services Server, in conjunction with the Analytic Services Integration Server automatically retrieves the data from the appropriate relational table source and passes it to Interactive Reporting. If a dimension has available hybrid analysis, it is indicated to the right of the level as shown below. Members Content values for a dimension. In the Location dimension, they could be San Francisco, Japan, Paris, 35 Main Street, Tokyo, USA, France, Rome, and so on. These all are values for location.
Members are shown only under the Values (I) icon and can be dragged only into the Top Labels or Side Labels panes in Data Layout.
Member Property A descriptive piece of information about a member that can be retrieved and displayed in the OLAPQuery. This information is metadata and does not in itself constitute a distinct member in the dimensional hierarchy. For example, lets assume the following hierarchy: Product Category Product Name
The Product Name level might have the following properties defined: Product Description Product SKU Color Size Weight
144
You can drag a property into the Data Layout with its corresponding level, but you cannot drag it into the Slicer or the Measures pane, or apply a filter to it.
Measures Numeric values in a database cube that are available for analysis. The measures could be margin, cost of goods sold, unit sales, budget amount, and so on. Individual measures are shown under the Measures icon and can be dragged only to the Measures pane.
Note: Analytic Services only. supports Analytic Services Attribute Dimensions. An Attribute Dimension displays in the OLAPQuery section with the word attribute to right of the Attribute Dimensions name. In addition, for each Attribute Dimension, creates an Attribute Calculation Dimension. An Attribute Calculation Dimension is displayed at the bottom of the Catalog pane. You can position the members contained within the Attribute Calculation Dimension in the Top or Side Labels of the Data Layout.
General OLAPQuery Options Description Defines how retrieves database totals and requeries the database.
Database Totals Retrieves database totals when the query is processed. Hardwire Mode Defines whether to requery the database when changes are made in the Data Layout.
If you select Hardwire mode, requeries the database automatically when you add an item to or remove an item from the Data Layout and instantaneously retrieve the data. You do not have to click Process. If you do not select Hardwire mode, you must click Process to requery the database whenever you make a change.
145
Table 22
Slicer Display
Member List Selects from a list of all members at the same level as the previously selected member. Tree Control Displays parent-child slicer value relationships. With Tree Control, you can select multiple values from a dimension as long as your database supports this function. (Databases such as Hyperion Analytic Services and IBM DB2 OLAP allow this).
Drill Options
Defines what level of data is the next level displayed when you drill down in an OLAPQuery.
Drill to Next Level Automatically displays data for the next level below the selected member. For example, in a dimension with levels of Year, Quarter, Month, and Date, doubleclicking on a Year level member name automatically displays all the data for the Quarter level belonging to that year.
Drill to All Levels Automatically displays all possible levels of data below the selected member. For example, in a dimension with levels of Year, Quarter, Month, and Date, doubleclicking on a Year level member name automatically displays all the data for the Quarter, Month, and Date levels belonging to that year.
Drill to Lowest Level Automatically displays data for only the lowest level belonging to the selected member (intermediate member levels are not shown). For example, in a dimension with levels of Year, Quarter, Month, and Date, doubleclicking on a Year level member name automatically displays all the data for the Date level belonging to that year.
146
Display Option for Analytic Services Database Description Defines query options in the following areas:
Suppress Missing Rows Suppresses the retrieval of any missing rows where all cells are null. Suppress Zero Rows Suppresses the retrieval of any zero rows where all cells are null. Specify the number of decimal places to retrieve Sets the number of decimal places that the server will return. Enable Hybrid Analysis Value Retrieval This feature allow you to retrieve the lowest levels of an Analytic Services cube that reside in an external relational database. These levels are not reflected in the cube structure (metadata) that is resident on the Analytic Services Server itself. Instead, their existence and retrieval is performed by the separate Analytic Services Integration Server product. In order for this functionality to be performed, however, the Analytic Services server must first receive instructions to enable Hybrid Analysis retrieval.This instruction takes the form of an Analytic Services Report Script keyword: < HYBRIDANALYSISON> Conversely, to disable Hybrid Analysis retrieval, the instruction keyword <HYBRIDANALYSISOFF> The applicable keyword used sent to the Analytic Services Server can be viewed on the Query Log.
This feature is only supported in Hyperion Analytic Services version 6.5 and IBM DB2 OLAP version 8.1. Alias Table Defines the alias table to use in an OLAPQuery.
Select an Alias Table When you use aliases to assign user-friendly names to database physical member and/or generation/level names, Analytic Services stores the aliases in an Alias Table in the cube. Since a cube can have multiple alias tables, you can select the alias table to use and modify the query based on the value you enter. For example, you could define Store Category members as codes, but define an alias for each Store Category to use as a descriptive alias in the Alias Table. In the following example, for the member name "0199", you could see either "January 11999, "Jan99" or Fiscal Month 1" depending on the selected alias table. By default, uses the default alias table and if another alias table were not selected, you would see "January 1999."
Physical Member Name = 0199 Default Alias Table Value = January11999 Alias Table 1 Value = Jan99 Alias Table 2 Value = Fiscal Month 1
147
Display Options for Microsoft OLE/DB Description Suppresses the retrieval of any empty rows for which there is no measure data.
Side Labels Contains non-quantifiable dimensions or members. Top Labels Contains non-quantifiable dimensions or members. Measures Contains quantifiable dimensions or measures. The Measures pane in Data Layout holds the values of the cube.
Note: Interactive Reporting treats time and date dimensions as non-quantifiable values.
2 Specify an OCE to use to connect to the multidimensional database; enter your user name and password if
prompted.
The Interactive Reporting document creates and switches to an OLAPQuery section. The Catalog pane displays the hierarchy of your multidimensional database.
3 If the Data Layout is not visible, click Data Layout on the Section title bar. 4 In the Catalog pane, select one or more measures (such as units or amounts) and choose OLAP > Add
Fact/Measure to add the item(s) to the Measures pane in Data Layout.
5 In the Catalog pane, select one or more levels or members and choose OLAP > Add Side Labels to add the
item to the Side Labels pane in Data Layout.
6 In the Catalog pane, select one or more levels or members and choose OLAP > Add Top Label to add the
item to the Top Labels pane in Data Layout.
To refresh the dimension values in the Catalog pane, select OLAP > Retrieve Dimensions.
When you drag items from the Catalog pane to the Data Layout, only the level names is displayed. For example, if you drag CA into the Data Layout, the Data Layout displays State. Level names are displayed in the Data Layout preceded by a icon.
148
You can reorient, or pivot, your OLAPQuery by interchanging the items in the top and side dimensions. This feature is useful for juxtaposing data in one dimension with data from other dimensions. By pivoting dimensions from the top to the side, alternate relationships become evident.
A dimension can be represented only on one axis. For example, if the level Year is in the Side Labels pane, you cannot drag the level Quarter to the Top Labels pane. If you move the level of one dimension, Interactive Reporting Studio automatically move all levels of the same dimension. To pivot data in the OLAPQuery section, move the items in the Data Layout panes. You cannot use the label handles to pivot data. Levels from the same dimension must be grouped together in both the Side Labels and Top Labels panes.
For example, you cannot use the following order for side-label levels, since levels from different dimensions are mixed (Year, Quarter, and Month come from the Time dimension, Store Type comes from the Store dimension, and Product Category comes from the Product dimension).
Instead, the Data Layout requires that you use this order (Year, Quarter, and Month are all from they same dimension so they are grouped together).
The hierarchy of a dimension cannot be broken. For example, Year must come before Quarter, which must come before Month. Analytic Services only If Hybrid Analysis is available and data is successfully retrieved from the Analytic Services servers, a dummy Level is added to the Data Layout called "Hybrid1". The new Level of data is shown in the Contents Pane. If data is not retrieved successfully from the Analytic Services servers (i.e. an error message is returned) the
149
message "No more levels to drill into" message is displayed. If you subsequently drills-down on a returned Hybrid Analysis Level of data, the retrieved Hybrid Analysis Level of data is called "Hybrid2" and so on.
OLE DB only If you retrieve dimensional level properties from the database, you can drag each property into the Data Layout after you add its corresponding level. For example, if the Data Layout contains Country, Year and you drag Manager, (a property of Country) into the Data Layout, the Manager property is kept with Country and not added after the Year level. A property cannot be dragged into the Slicer pane, the Measures pane in Data Layout, or have a filter applied to it. Note that in order to retrieve dimensional level properties, you must enable the Show Member Properties checkbox when creating the OCE.
OLAPQuery Member and Level Rules Component Type Level Level Level Member Member Member Level, Member Level, Member Level, Level, Member, Member, Member Query returns: All countries All states regardless of country All cities regardless of state or country Canada only California only San Francisco only All States regardless of country and San Francisco All Countries and California (not just the USA) All Countries, All States
Data Layout item(s) Country (All) State (All) City (All) Canada CA San Francisco State (All), San Francisco Country (All), CA Country (All), State (All), CA, NV, San Francisco
150
Specifying a Slicer Drilling Down Drilling Up Hybrid Analysis and Drilling (Analytic Services and DB2 only) Adding Computed Items Using OLAPQuery Functions
Specifying a Slicer
A slicer is a sort of third axis in a query that filters data. The other axes are the row axis and the column axis. A slicer defines a logical slice of the server cube by instructing the server to ignore all values not part of your slice. For example if you were running a query for general category stores, you could apply a slicer that slices the category stores into store subsets, such as computer stores, discount stores, and electronic stores. When working with a slicer, use only an individual member from a dimension. The dimension cannot be used in a Top Label or Side Label (no dimension can be represented on more than one axis at any time).
Tip: A query can have multiple slicers, each from a different dimension.
To specify a slicer:
1 Click Slicer on the Section title bar to open the Slicer pane. 2 Select a member from a dimension in the Catalog pane and drag it to the Slicer pane.
Every dimension folder contains a members subfolder named Values for that domain. The subfolder contains the members eligible for selection in the Slicer pane.
3 Click Process.
If you are running in Hardwire mode (see Processing OLAP Queries Automatically on page 157), the slice is applied instantly.
151
Drilling Down
The Drill Down feature retrieves data from the multidimensional database cube, following the hierarchy down to the granular level. When you find a specific item that you want to learn more about, such as a product line, you can drill down into the item label. You can drill down on more than one item as well as drill down on all items at the same time. For a member drill down, any Top Label or Side Label can be drilled down so that you can view the structure of the hierarchies for any particular dimension. Every time you select a specific label in a dimension row or column, you show only the data for that label value. When you select the dimension tab for a level, you show all the members of that dimension level. Use one of the following methods to drill down on a label:
Double-click the label. Select the label and choose Drill Down on the shortcut menu. Select the label and choose OLAP > Drill Down.
Tip: You can specify what level of data is the next level displayed when you drill down in an
Note: Analytic Services only. For a measure drill down, you can show how different measures consolidate together. A drill down on a measure is done on a progressive basis, one level at a time on a 1 to n path (sequential rather than nested). For example, if Profit is the parent of Tax and Pre-Tax Profit, and Revenue and Expenses are children of Pre-Tax Profit, then the Tax and Pre-Tax columns are drilled down first and you must double-click the Pre-Tax label to display the Revenue and Expense columns.
Drilling Up
If you used the Drill Down feature, you return to your original view of the data by drilling up one level at a time. To drill up, select the level to drill up to and use one of the following methods:
Double-click the level. Choose Drill Up on the shortcut menu. Choose OLAP > Drill Up.
152
If you can drill into data returned by way of hybrid analysis, Interactive Reporting adds a dummy level to the Data Layout called "Hybrid1" and displays the new Level of data accordingly in the Contents Pane. If data is not retrieved successfully from the Analytic Services servers, you get the message: "No more levels to drill into" message. If you continue to drill down on the Hybrid Analysis level of data, each successful drill down returns the data as "Hybrid2" in the Data Layout (and "Hybrid3", "Hybrid4" etc. for any subsequent Hybrid Analysis Level retrievals). You can use drill up on Hybrid Analysis data to redisplay that level as the lowest level in the Contents Pan. All lower level Hybrid Analysis data is removed from the Contents Pane and Data Layout.
153
Name Specify a new column name that reflects the computation result. Definition Build an expression by adding items from the pad or the Functions dialog box.
Use the keypad to select and insert arithmetic and logical operators. If you are familiar with MDX (Multi Dimensional eXpressions), type your instruction directly in the Definition field.
Measure Select the MDX equivalent from the list of available measures for the expression. Functions Apply a numeric function to a selected measure in the Definition field. Depending on the function you select, the Functions dialog box changes to accommodate the selected function. For more information about functions, see Using OLAPQuery Functions on page 154.
154
Interactive Reporting Functions Non-MDX functions that allow you to perform common mathematical computations in MDX. The % of Column, % of Row, and % of Total functions allow you to use only a measure name from the query (not all measures in the cube) as a parameter. MDX functions Standard mathematical functions that you apply to computed item expressions. Hyperion Intelligence Clients supports a number of MDX functions. (For more information on MDX functions, consult your MDX documentation.)
Table 26 provides a quick reference to the commands available on the Query menu and lists any related shortcuts. The following table lists the functions available in the OLAPQuery section.
Table 26
OLAPQuery Functions Type of Function Interactive Reporting Interactive Reporting Interactive Reporting Interactive Reporting Description Calculates the value of the specified measure as a percentage of the total for the column. Calculates the value of the specified measure as a percentage of the total for the row. Calculates the value of the specified measure as a percentage of the total for all rows and columns. Calculates the percentage change of the specified measure for a particular dimension from the previous member in that dimension. For example, this function could be used to calculate the percentage change from sales from the previous year. Calculates the absolute change of the specified measure for a particular dimension from the previous member in that dimension. For example, this function could be used to calculate the difference in sales from the previous year. Calculates the average of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset. Returns the correlation of a dataset against two measures. Calculates the number of members for the specified dimension in the report. Measures the tendency of two values to vary together. Variance is the average of the squared deviation of a value from its mean. The covariance is the average of the values of the deviations of feature values from their means. Calculates the linear regression of a dataset and returns the value of b in the regression line y = ax + b. Calculates the linear regression of a dataset and returns r2 (the coefficient of determination). Calculates the linear regression of a dataset and returns the value of a in the regression line y = ax + b.
Absolute Change
Interactive Reporting
155
Table 26
OLAPQuery Functions (Continued) Type of Function MDX MDX MDX MDX MDX MDX MDX Description Calculates the linear regression of a dataset and returns the variance that fits the regression line y = ax + b. Returns the maximum value of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset. Calculates the median value of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset. Returns the minimum value of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset. Calculates the standard deviation of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset. Calculates the sum of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset. Calculates the variance of the selected measure evaluated over the specified dataset.
2 Select the Interactive Reporting or MDX function that you want use from the Functions list.
A description of the selected function is displayed below the Functions list and explains the type of calculation the function performs.
4 Define the dataset by which to evaluate the function and click OK.
To add a member or level to the dataset from the Cube Hierarchy list, select a member or level and click Add. To remove a member or level from the dataset, select a member or level and click Remove.
156
To process an OLAP query, choose Tools > Process Query > Option.
Since a document can contain multiple queries, the Process drop-down list has three processing options:
Process Current Processes the current object. In some cases more than one query may be processed, for example, if a report references results sets from multiple queries. Process Current is the default selection when using the toolbar button. Process All Processes all the queries in the document. Process Custom Opens the Process Custom dialog box so that you can indicate which queries to process by selecting a querys check box.
sends the query to the database and retrieve the data to the OLAPQuery section. While the data is being retrieved, the Status bar displays a dynamic count indicating rate and progress of server data processing and network transfer.
To select Hardwire mode, choose OLAP > OLAP Query Options and select Hardwire Mode in
the Design sectionally the General tab.
To download the OLAPQuery data set, select OLAP > Download To Results.
An OLAPResults section is created for the query. You can use the OLAPResults data set to insert a new chart, pivot, or other report.
157
Applying Filters
Filters enable you to define and apply filters to a query once Top Labels or Side Labels have been added to the query. You set filters by applying comparison operators on the values for a specific member. Review the following sections for information on:
Applying Member Selection Filters Applying Measure Filters (Analytic Services) Applying Variable Filters
To apply a member selection filter, drag individual member values from the Catalog pane to
the Data Layout. Another method of member selection uses an expression to dynamically retrieve the list of members that satisfy selected parameters, for example, the Top N or Bottom N. You specify these parameters in the Filter dialog box.
Note: If you used the Drill Down feature to navigate down to a members level, you have to use the Drill Up feature to return to the original level before you apply Member Selection filters.
2 Specify the information requested in the Filter dialog box and click OK.
158
2 Select the data operator from the Data Operator drop-down list.
The selections shown on this list depend on the database to which you are connected. See Operator Types and Data Operators on page 162.
3 Specify any database specific parameter requests, such as a column index (that is, the column on which to
apply the measure filter) or value.
4 Move the member(s) to the Applied Filters list and click OK.
How Databases Access the Filter Dialog Box Access Points Side Labels pane, Top Labels pane, Measures pane, Slicer pane Side Labels pane, Top Labels pane, Slicer pane
2 Select the method for retrieving items from the database from the Operator Type list.
Applying Filters
159
The selections shown on this list depend on the database to which you are connected. See Operator Types and Data Operators on page 162.
3 Specify any database-specific parameter requests. 4 Click Show Values to display values in the database. 5 In the Members field, select the member(s) that you want to define as a filter. 6 Move the member(s) to the Applied Filters list. 7 Click Set As Variable and click OK.
The OLAPQuery section is redisplayed.
8 Click Process.
The Filter dialog box is redisplayed.
9 Select the member(s) that you want to define as a variable filter in the Members field. 10 Move the member(s) as a variable filter to the Applied Filters list and click OK.
2 Select the data operator from the Data Operator drop-down list.
The selections shown on this list depend on the database to which you are connected. See Operator Types and Data Operators on page 162.
3 Specify any database-specific parameter requests, such as a column index or value. 4 Move the measure to the Applied Filters list. 5 Click Set As Variable and click OK.
The OLAPQuery Section is redisplayed.
6 Click Process.
The Filter dialog box is redisplayed.
7 Choose a measure variable filter by selecting the data operator from the Data Operator drop-down list and
specifying any database-specific parameter requests, such as a column index or value.
8 Move the measure variable filter to the Applied Filters list and click OK.
160
2 Select a member from a dimension in the Catalog pane and drag it to the Slicer pane.
Every dimension folder contains a members subfolder named Values For Domain, which contains the members that are eligible for selection in the Slicer pane.
3 Double-click the member in the Slicer pane that you want to use to filter data.
The Slicer dialog box is displayed.
4 Select the member for which you want to filter data. 5 Click the Set As Variable field and click OK.
The OLAPQuery section is redisplayed.
6 Click Process.
The Slicer dialog box is redisplayed.
7 Select the member(s) you want to use as a variable filter and click OK.
3 Move the member(s) to the Applied Filters list and click OK.
You can also double-click the member to add it to the Applied Filters list. The OLAPQuery section is redisplayed.
4 Click Process.
The Filter dialog box is redisplayed.
5 In the Members field, select the member(s) that you want to use as a variable filter. 6 Move the member(s) you want to use as a variable filter to the Applied Filters list and click OK.
Applying Filters
161
OLE DB Operator Types and Data Operators (see Table 28) Analytic Services Operator Types and Data Operators (see Table 29)
Table 28
OLAP Query Operator Types and Data Operators Description Creates a filter based on a member(s) retrieved from the database. (Supported for the Analytic Services, MSOLAP and SAP/BW databases). Creates a filter based on a measure that you specify. Retrieves only the top N values where each top N value is at least the specified Index value. Retrieves only the top N % values where each top N % value is at least the specified Index value. Retrieves the top N (the smallest number possible) values, such that their sum is at least the specified Index value. Retrieves only the bottom N values where each bottom N value is at least the specified Index value. Retrieves the bottom N% where each bottom N % value is at least the specified Index value. Retrieves the bottom N (the smallest number possible) values such that their sum is at least the specified Index value. Description Retrieves only records where the filtered item equals the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item does not equal the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item is less than the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item is less than the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item is greater than the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item equals, or is greater than the specified value(s).
Operator Type Select Members from DB Select by Measure Top N Top N % Top Sum Bottom N Bottom N % Bottom Sum
Data Operator = Equal < > Not Equal < Less than < = Less than or Equal to > Greater than > = Greater than or Equal to
162
Table 29
Analytic Services Operator Types and Data Operators Definition Retrieves only records where the filtered item equals the specified value(s). The Match Member performs a trailing-wildcard member search for member names and alias names that match the pattern you specify. It returns the member and alias names it finds. The search uses the Analytic Services formula: mbrName|genName|levName, "pattern"). The character pattern to search for, including a wildcard character (* or ?). ? substitutes one occurrence of any character. You can use ? anywhere in the pattern. * substitutes any number of characters. You can use * only at the end of the pattern. To include spaces in the character pattern, enclose the pattern in double quotation marks (""). Description Retrieves only records where the filtered item equals the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item does not equal the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item is less than the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item is less than the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item is greater than the specified value(s). Retrieves only records where the filtered item equals, or is greater than the specified value(s).
Data Operator = Equal < > Not Equal < Less than < = Less than or Equal to > Greater than > = Greater than or Equal to
Suppressing Rows Adding Totals Adding Data Functions Showing OLAP Results as a Chart
Suppressing Rows
You can suppress the following types of rows:
Missing Rows (Analytic Services only) Suppresses the retrieval of any missing rows where all cells are null. Zero Rows (Analytic Services only) Suppresses the retrieval of any zero rows where all cells are null.
163
Empty Rows (OLE DB only) Suppresses the retrieval of any empty rows for which there is no measure data.
To suppress rows in your OLAPQuery data, select OLAP > OLAP Query Options and click the
DB Specific tab. The options that are displayed on the DB Specific tab depend on the database to which you are connected. See Database-specific OLAPQuery Options on page 147 for more information.
Adding Totals
enables you to add either database totals or local totals. Database totals are calculated by querying the actual database. Local totals are calculated and applied to surface values on the Interactive Reporting Studio.
To remove database totals, remove the checkmark next to Database Totals on the General tab
and click Process to reprocess the query.
164
To remove local totals, click on a total label and press the Delete key.
OLAP Data Functions Description Returns sum of all values. This is the default function in all report sections. Returns average of all values. Returns number of values. Returns highest value. Returns lowest value. Returns surface values as a percentage of their respective column item. Returns surface values as a percentage of their respective row item. Returns surface values as a percentage of all like values in the report.
Data Function Sum Average Count Maximum Minimum % of Column % of Row % of Grand
165
166
2 Fill in the options in the Set Drill-Through dialog box and click OK.
Table 31
Drill Through Options Description The dimensions in the current OLAP query. Click a dimension to select it. The dimension selected by the user. This is the dimension to use for mapping. The relational query sections that are currently available. To specify a relational query, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list and select a query from the list that is displayed. The topics contained in the selected relational query. Click a topic to select it. The topic selected by the user. This is the topic to use for mapping. The selected topic should have topic items with names corresponding to the selected dimension levels. Maps the selected dimension to a topic (or unmaps the selected dimension from a topic). When you map a dimension to a topic, Interactive Reporting Studio store an internal link between the dimension and the selected topic. The topic used to map to the OLAP measures. The selected topic should have topic items with names corresponding to the OLAP measures. To specify a topic, click the arrow to the right of the drop-down list and select a topic from the list that is displayed. The topics that appear are the topics available in the selected query.
167
Tip: In order to drill-down to any level in the relational data, enable the Set as Dimension
property for the relational topics that represent the OLAP dimension data. To do this, rightclick the topic in the original relational query section Contents pane, select Properties, and click the checkbox next to Set as Dimension in the Topic Item Properties dialog box.
Drilling Through
To drill through from a mulit-dimensional database to a relational database:
1 Select a dimension and drill-down to the lowest level. 2 Do one of the following:
The Drill-Through dialog box is displayed enabling you know that there are no additional OLAP levels to drill into.
Tip: After you drill through on a dimension and create a new Pivot section, you can return to the
OLAPQuery section and drill down on additional dimensions if desired. When you drill down on an additional dimension, you can choose whether to create a new Pivot section or update an existing pivot section with the new dimension data.
Tip: If you update an existing pivot section with new data, ensure that the new data to be added to
the Pivot section maps to a Fact Topic that is the same as the Fact Topic in the existing Pivot.
168
Command Retrieve Dimensions Add Side Label Add Top Label Add Fact/Measure Add Computed Item Drill Down Drill Up Drill Through Remove Total Hide Items Show Hidden Items Show All Items Download To Results Show As Chart OLAP Query Options Data Functions Set Drill-Through
Description Refreshes the dimension values in the Catalog pane. Adds the selected item to the Side Labels pane. Adds the selected item to the Top Labels pane. Adds the selected item to the Measures pane. Opens the Computed Items dialog box. (This feature is for MS OLAP only) Allows you to progressively narrow your focus on a selected item. Returns the original view of data. Drills through from a multi-dimensional database to a relational database. Removes local totals from selected dimensions. Removes selected items from the OLAPQuery report. Retrieves hidden items from the selected row or column to the OLAPQuery report. Retrieves all hidden items to the OLAPQuery report. Downloads the OLAPQuery data set to an OLAPResults section for offline work. Charts the OLAPQuery data set; automatically creates OLAPChart and OLAPResults sections. Accesses the OLAPQuery Options dialog box, where you can set options for your OLAPQuery. Recalculates the surface values in the OLAPQuery data set. Accesses the Set Drill-Through dialog box, where you can define the options for drilling through from a multidimensional database to a relational database.
[Del]
169
170
Chapter
8
This chapter explains how to use pivot tables to quickly summarize or cross-tabulate large amounts of data.
In This Chapter Pivot Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Creating a Pivot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Working with Pivot Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Using Data Calculations in Pivot Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Selecting Pivot Table Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Pivot Section Aggregation and Surface Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Pivot Menu Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
171
Pivot Section
The Pivot section enables you to extract meaningful information from your query results. Pivot tables are interactive tools used to slice and dice data for ad-hoc, interactive, and multidimensional analysis. Pivot tables enables you to add, move, rename, focus on, and group dimensions to gain customized views of the data. rotate or pivot rows and columns to see different summaries of data or display the details for areas of interest. You also can automatically include subtotals and grand totals, or use your own formulas by adding computed items.
Facts Core numeric data that you slice and dice dimensionally in your analysis. Dimensions Descriptive items that break aggregate data (facts) into logical categories. In the Pivot section, dimensions are either Column Labels or Row Labels.
For example, if you analyze Unit Sales by region, the numbers are your data values or facts. Region is a dimension. Presented in aggregate, facts are subdivided by your chosen dimension labels.
Drag each Request item to be included in the table from the Catalog pane to a pane in the Data Layout (Column Labels, Row Labels, or Facts). In the Catalog pane, select one of more Request items and select Pivot > Add Selected Items > Column Labels, Row Labels or Facts
Tip: Add Request items such as Unit Sales or Amount Sales to the Facts pane in Data Layout to
create the data grid. Add dimensions such as Product Line or Region to the column and row labels panes in the Data Layout to create subdivisions.
Tip: You can select and drag multiple items to the same Data Layout pane to add multiple values or
dimensional levels for analysis. Items are hierarchically ordered in the sequence in which they are displayed in the Data Layout pane.
172
Pivoting Data
Use the Pivot feature to reorient the axes of a pivot table and view your data in new ways. pivoting a table enables you to more easily compare the new data to data in the originating table, which makes pivot tables more powerful than common spreadsheets.
To pivot data in a table, select a dimension handle and drag it to any position on the same or
opposite dimensional axis.
To automatically chart your pivot table, select Insert > Chart This Pivot.
Interactive Reporting creates a new Chart section that displays a bar chart based on the data from the pivot table.
Selecting Pivot Table Elements Moving Pivot Table Elements Changing Label Nesting Levels Sorting Pivot Tables
173
To select a column of Row Labels or a row of Column Labels for formatting, layout, or analysis,
click the dimension handle at the end of the column or row of labels.
To select one complete row or column for formatting or analysis, press the modifier key ([Alt]
for Windows or [Ctrl+Alt] for Motif. Then, select the row or column label.
To select an individual Column Label or Row Label for formatting, select the label itself.
To remove Request items from the Data Layout or columns from the Content pane, select the
element that you want to remove and select Pivot > Remove Selected Item.
Note: When you delete a Request item from the Data Layout or a column from the Content pane, you cannot use the Undo feature to reinsert the column or Request item.
To move a pivot element item using the Data Layout, click the item name in the Data Layout
pane to select it, then drag the item to a new position or to another Data Layout pane. The display updates to reflect the repositioning or reassignment of the item.
Note: To move items between Column Labels or Row Labels panes and the Fact pane (or vice versa), you must first remove them from the Data Layout, and then add them again to the chosen pane.
174
Adding Totals and Subtotals Adding Cumulative Totals Using Data Functions Using Surface Values in Data Functions Using Weighted Averages Adding Computed Items
175
For example, assume your pivot table has facts of Units and Amount Sold. These facts are further broken down by Region and Territory on the side, and by Year and Quarter on column. Calculating totals by Region produces a total row at the bottom of the pivot table, summing the data from all regions for each column. Calculating totals by Quarter produces one total column under each year label, summing the data for each set of four Quarter labels.
Tip: An intelligent aggregate is applied to the specified data when totaling unless you specify
otherwise. For example, the total of a column of averages calculates an average rather than a sum total.
3 If desired, type a new name for the pivot cume. 4 Select the scope of the pivot cume from the drop-down list box.
The Scope drop-down list box includes all of the dimensions in the pivot table. The default scope is the lowest level dimension that is displayed in the pivot table.
176
Analyzing Data with Pivot Tables
5 Click OK.
A new fact column is added that maintains a cumulative running total of the original fact by the dimension (scope) specified.
Pivot Data Functions Description Returns sum of all values. This is the default setting. Returns average of all values. Returns number of values. Returns highest value. Returns lowest value. Returns surface values as a percentage of their respective column item. Returns surface values as a percentage of their respective row item. Returns surface values as a percentage of all like values in the pivot table. Returns the incremental difference between the final two instances of a total column or row. Apply only at the innermost dimensional level of a pivot table.
Function Sum Average Count Maximum Minimum % of Column % of Row % of Grand Increase
177
Table 33
Pivot Data Functions Description Returns the percent difference between the final two instances of a total column or total row. Apply only at the innermost dimensional level of a pivot table. Returns average of values; null values excluded. Returns number of null values. Returns number of values; null values excluded.
Note: Null values are empty values for which no data exists. Null values are not equal to zero.
Detail Cells
where % represents modulo (remainder) operator. In other words, the formula is defined as:
Integer remainder of (Unit column cell value /50) + 1
178
For the Unit column values for each city within a state, the formula works as expected. For example, in the Oakland, CA cell, the formula is:
Units 910
Modulo (remainder) of 910 / 50 = 10 Add 1 to assign a value of 11 (shown above). For the California Total row, the value shown is 41, which is the result of the following formula:
Total Units for California = 12390
Modulo of 123900/50 = 40 Add 1 to assign a value of 41 The Modulo of 41 is not the sum of the displayed cell values for all cities in California, instead it is the modulo formula applied only to the cell containing the Unit column city total for California. To see a break cell total value of 145, use the True Computed Item feature total, which would reference the displayed values in the detail cells (this example assumes a Sum data function):
46 +1 + 11 +1 +46 ( = 145
179
underlying values are used, the results often are displayed incongruous with the aggregate surface values of the chart element. In other words, a total of the underlying values does not match the total of the surface figures. Consider a simple pivot table with two values of 20 and 30. Each of these is already a total of underlying values:
20 = 8 + 12 30 = 10 + 20
To match surface-level values in your calculation, you can instead apply surface values to the totals derived from data functions. For example, if you use surface values for an average applied to a total, the total is converted to the average of the surface values in the corresponding element.
Any calculation would calculate each man as 0.6666 and each woman as 2.
180
Weighted averages can also be used to apply different levels of importance to a given item. Take, for example, a survey, which has multiple questions. The responses can be rated on a scale of 1 to 5. By assigning a weight to each question based on the level of importance (the higher the number the more important), and using that weight in calculating a weighted average, you can arrive at averages that are more meaningful. To use weighted averages, you must add a column of data to the database. This data indicates the relative weight of each corresponding value in another column. The statistical calculation for weighted averages depends on the following mathematical formula:
( c w ) sum ( w ) Table 34
Example of Weighted Averages Units Sold 80 200 60 900 Type of Store Electronics Computer Electronics Discount Weight 8 10 8 2
4 Select the item that contains the weighted values and click OK.
The item in the Request line is renamed to indicate it is a weighted value.
6 Go to the Pivot section and drag the Weighted item from the Catalog pane to the Data Layout.
You may now use all of the various data functions on the weighted values.
Note: Weighting functions work only in the Pivot section.
181
3 Define the new data item by building an expression in the Definition text box.
Use the operator buttons to insert arithmetic and logical operators at the insertion point.
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select Request items to place in the equation. Click Functions to apply scalar functions using the Functions dialog box.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace spaces in item names with underscores (_).
4 If necessary, click Options to set a new data type for the item. 5 When the equation is complete, click OK.
The computed item is added to the Data Layout and it is displayed as a column in the pivot table.
For Simple and Weighted Moving Averages, if any values are missing/null in the source Data Column, the Moving Average functionality compensates by subtracting the number of instances of null values from the Window divisor. For example, consider the following example for the Sales value for Feb which is null:
182
Use Surface Value Recalculates the values in the visible cells or surface of the pivot rather than the values in the Results section. True Computed Item Totals Recalculates break totals so that each total value is equal to the sum of their displayed detail cells. True computed item totals use aggregation according to the specified data function and does not rely on the computed item total formula. If you disable this option, the break total cell values are derived from the computed item formula applied to the detail cell. Average and Count aggregation Data Functions are not evaluated in True Total mode unless you enable Use Surface Values. If you do not enable Use Surface Values, the Average and Count aggregation are calculated using the count of the underlying Table/Result Section data values instead of the displayed Pivot values.
Enable Null Facts In Computed Items Enable this option if you want to evaluates a null fact value (an empty cell value) as a zero fact value for non-Moving functions. For Moving Function calculations, where the presence of all displayed Fact cell must be considered in calculations, the following behavior occurs when null fact values are considered as zero. The default option to evaluate and show null values is disabled.If you want to evaluate and show null values for a new Pivot section, then you must the select the this option before creating the Pivot section.
For Simple and Weighted Moving Averages, if any values are missing/null in the source Data Column, the Moving Average functionality compensates by subtracting the number of instances of null values from the Window divisor. For Moving Maximum, Moving Minimum, Moving Difference, Moving Sum and Moving Median functions moving functions, if any values are missing/null in the source Data Column, the missing source values are omitted and the calculation Window size shrunk correspondingly. Exponential Moving Averages treat missing source Fact values as having a value of zero. For all Moving Functions, except Exponential Moving Averages, if all the values in the particular calculation Window are null or zero, the Moving Function value is also, by default, null or zero. For all Moving Functions, except Exponential Moving Averages, if the Moving Function calculation Window size exceeds the available number of input fact values, the returned set of Moving Function values should be null. When this option is disabled, the Pivot Sections that receive their data from a relational Query Section, ignore Fact cells with null data when calculating Computed Items. That is, the calculation is simply skipped for the null cell.
183
There are three key component parts of the Pivot Section display including: Detail Fact cells, Break Total cells and Computed Items cells. The behavior of these component parts is discussed in various typical Pivot usage scenarios.
Results/Table Section and Pivot Section Aggregation Data Functions Break Totals Computed Items Surface Values Pivot Section Levels
A Pivot Section is a flexible tabular display of aggregated data in Interactive Reporting that receives its source of data from either a Results or Table Section. As an example, the same Table Section City/Units Sold data from above can be converted to a simple Pivot Section as shown below. In the Pivot Section, the Units Sold data has been aggregated; that is, there is only one occurrence of each City name - shown in the Pivot Section Row Labels. The Units Sold data for each City has been summed from the entries in the Table Section above to show a single value for each City - these are the Pivot Section Detail Facts.
184
Break Totals
A Break Total is a user-enabled Pivot Section row that can display summarized Fact information at the change of a level of Row Label information. For example, in the above Pivot Section, if you wanted to see the sum of Unit Sales for all Cities, you could add a "Sum" Break Total line at the end of the City Row Label level as shown below:
If you intend to use Break Totals in your Pivot Section, be sure to enable surface values instead of using the underlying table data. In this way, Break Totals reflects the aggregation of displayed detail data. If you use the Add Totals menu option to add a Break Total, the Break Total preserves any data function applied to a Fact Column.
Computed Items
A computed item is a user-created column of Fact data in a Pivot Section that performs a userspecified calculation using existing fact data. As an example, below, a Computed Item column has been created to show the "Units Sold" fact amounts multiplied by 2. Each computed item column cell performs its calculations on the data that is used to create the corresponding cells of the fact column on which it is based:
185
Surface Values
Surface Values enable you to aggregate and calculate Pivot Section data based on data displayed in the Pivot Section as opposed to data from the underlying Results or Table Section.
Simple Pivot Section With Detail Cell Values Only (No Break Totals) Surface Values Disabled Simple Pivot Section With Detail Cell Values Only (No Break Totals)Surface Values Enabled Regular Break Total LineSurface Values Disabled Regular Break Total LineSurface Values Enabled Explicitly Specifying an Aggregation Data Function Across an Entire Break Total Row
Simple Pivot Section With Detail Cell Values Only (No Break Totals) Surface Values Disabled
The example below shows a simple Pivot Section with detail cell values only (no break totals and surface values have been disabled). (Unless otherwise specified, this Table Section is used as the source data for Pivot Section examples shown throughout this appendix.)
186
Review the Table Section below that shows values of "Units Sold" for some sample cities in the USA. The visible Fact values for each City in the Pivot Section are equivalent to the sum of each City's individual constituent "Units Sold" values in the underlying Table Section. In other words the Row Label of Los Angeles and the Pivot-displayed "Units Sold" value of 1,100 have been evaluated by summing each "Units Sold" value for Los Angeles in the underlying Table Section (i.e. 500 + 400 + 100 + 100 = 1,100).
In addition to the sum method for aggregation in the Pivot Section, you can explicitly specify a number of other aggregation methods, or Data Functions, in which to collect and represent the underlying Table Section data as Facts in the Pivot Section. These Data Functions include:
Average The displayed Pivot Fact value is the average (mean) value of the Fact values for this Pivot Row Label in the underlying Table Section (i.e. the sum of the corresponding values in the Table Section divided by the number of occurrences (rows) of these values). Count The displayed Pivot Fact value is the sum of the number of occurrences of Fact values for this Row Label in the underlying Table Section. Maximum The displayed Pivot Fact value is the maximum value of all Fact occurrences in the underlying Table Section for this Row Label. Minimum The displayed Pivot Fact value is the minimum value of all Fact occurrences in the underlying Table Section for this Row Label.
The effect of applying the above different aggregation Data Functions on Pivot Fact columns can be illustrated in the following Pivot Section:
187
The "Units Sold" Fact column is evaluated using a Sum Data Function as above, whereas the "Average Of Units Sold" column uses the Average aggregation Data Function. That is, the "Average Of Units Sold" Fact value for Los Angeles is evaluated according to the following formula: The Sum of "Units Sold" values for Los Angeles in the underlying Table Section divided by the number of occurrences (rows) of "Units Sold" values for Los Angeles in the underlying Table Section or
(500 + 400 + 100 + 100) / 4 = 1100/4 = 275
The "Count Of Units Sold" value for Los Angeles is 4, which is evaluated by using the Count aggregation Data Function. It is equal to the count or number of individual "Units Sold" row occurrences for Los Angeles in the underlying Table Section The "Max Of Units Sold" for Los Angeles is 500, which is evaluated using the Maximum aggregation Data Function. This function returns the maximum single "Units Sold" value from all "Units Sold" values for Los Angeles in the underlying Table Section. The "Min Of Units Sold" for Los Angeles is 100, which is evaluated using the Minimum aggregation Data Function. This returns the minimum single "Units Sold" value from all "Units Sold" values for Los Angeles in the underlying Table Section.
Simple Pivot Section With Detail Cell Values Only (No Break Totals)Surface Values Enabled
If you enable the "Surface Values" property (by selecting Use Surface Values from the Pivot Option dialog. Selecting Pivot Table Elements on page 174) the Pivot Section display from above changes to:
188
The Fact columns have now been recalculated to use what would be a displayed (i.e. surface) summed, aggregated value for each City as a source of input data (i.e. the values that are actually displayed in the "Units Sold" column). As a result, the "Average Of Units Sold" for Seattle references the sum of underlying "Units Sold" values for Seattle (that is, the same value that is displayed for Seattle in the "Units Sold" column). This value is 300 and there is only one value occurrence displayed for Seattle. Consequently, the "Average Of Units Sold for Seattle" is 300 divided by 1 which is 300. Likewise, the "Count Of Units Sold" column uses the displayed "Units Sold" value for each City as a basis for calculation. Since there is always only one displayed value per City, the "Count Of Units Sold" for each City always has a value of 1. The "Maximum Of Units Sold" and "Minimum Of Units Sold" column cell values are exactly the same as their equivalent cells in the "Units Sold" column. Since there is only one cell value available per City, by definition that value is always the Maximum or Minimum value available. Since the lowest level of data displayed in a Pivot section is always aggregated from the underlying Table section values, it is recommended that you disable surface values when applying a sum or other data function.
Notice that, the regular Break Total row performs aggregation of each Break Total cell value from the underlying Table Section data by using the aggregation Data Function that has been specified for that Fact column.
189
For example, the "Average Of Units Sold" Fact column Break Total cell has a value of 2100. This value has been evaluated by using the Average Data Function (which is the Data Function that has been specified already for that column) on the underlying Table Section data. The equation is: Sum all "Units Sold" values for all Cities in the underlying Table Section and divide by the total number of occurrences of those values. or
(500 + 400 + 100 + 100 + 300 + 200 + 100 + 250 + 50 + 100) / 10 = 2100/10 = 210
Likewise, The "Count Of Units Sold" Break Total value refers to the underlying Table Section values and returns the total number of occurrences of "Units Sold" values there for all Cities. This amount equals 10. The "Max Of Units Sold" Break Total value refers to the underlying Table Section and returns the single maximum "Units Sold" amount for all Cities. This amount equals 500. The "Min Of Units Sold" Break Total value refers to the underlying Table Section and returns the single minimum "Units Sold" amount for all Cities. This amount equals 50.
All cell values for each column in the Break Total line have been updated to show the aggregation of all Fact values that are displayed in that column using the aggregation data function specified for that column. The Break Total value for the Units Sold column is shown to be 2100 which is the sum (i.e. the aggregation data function used for that column) of all displayed Fact detail cell values in the column (this value, 2100, happens to be the same as the value shown when surface values were disabled and the underlying Table Section values were used, because of the mathematical nature of a sum operation). For the Average Of Units Sold column the Average aggregation data Function is used for the Fact detail cells. As a result, this same data function is used to evaluate the Break Total cell value. The value of 525 is evaluated to be the sum of the displayed fact detail cells (= 2,100 = 1,100 + 600 + 300 + 100) divided by the number of occurrences of displayed fact detail cell values (4).
190
The Count Of Units Sold column uses the Count data function. As a result the Break Total value uses the Count data function operating against the number of occurrences of displayed Fact detail cells. Since there are four fact detail cell values in this column, the Break Total value is 4. The Max Of Units Sold column uses the Maximum data function. As a result the Break Total value uses the Maximum data function to evaluate the largest number within the displayed Fact detail cells. This number is 1,100 which is the value displayed in the Break Total cell for this column. The Min Of Units Sold column uses the Minimum data function. As a result, the Break Total value uses the Minimum data function to evaluate the largest number within the displayed Fact detail cells. This number is 1,100 which is the value displayed in the Break Total cell for this column.
Explicitly Specifying an Aggregation Data Function Across an Entire Break Total Row
With a regular Break Total line, as described above, the aggregation Data Function that is applied to each Break Total cell is the aggregation Data Function that is already applied to each Fact column. However, you can explicitly specify an aggregation data function to apply to all cells on a Break Total row. To do this, select the entire Break Total row (by pressing the Alt and mouse left-click buttons simultaneously) and then select the appropriate data function from the mouse rightclick speed menu or the Pivot menu. As an example, the row entitled Total Average below, is a regular Break Total line which has had the Average aggregation Data Function explicitly applied to all of its cells (the row entitled Total is the regular Break Total row from above):
The "Total - Average" calculates the average value of "Units Sold" from the underlying Table Section for all cells, that is, the Total - Average is the aggregated sum of all underlying "Units Sold" values divided by the number of occurrences of "Units Sold" values. You can see how this concept works across all cells on a Break Total row by reviewing the example below. This example Break Total rows named "Total Sum", "Total - Count", "Total Max", "Total - Min" which have the Sum, Count, Maximum and Minimum Data Functions respectively forced across their rows:
191
You can override any cell in a Break Total row which has a forced data function. To override the Break Total Data Function, you select the Fact cell in that column and then select the required data function from the speed-menu. As an example, the "Count Of Units Sold" column from above has been selected and the Count data function has been explicitly assigned to this column. The resulting Pivot display is nearly identical to the example above except the entire "Count Of Units Sold" column has its Fact Detail and Break Total cells evaluated by the Count data function as described above:
Column Data Function (Count) - Overrides Break Total Rrow Data Functions
192
To ensure consistency, the source of data for computed items should be governed by the type of computed item function rather than being governed "globally" by the Surface Values property. Computed Item functions that operate on aggregated data such as "Avg" and "ColMax" should always receive their input data from the underlying Results or Table data. Computed Item functions that expect a single value as input, such as Sqrt, should receive their data from the displayed surface values. Computed Items that refer directly to other Pivot Section columns without wrapping in a Function reference (such as "Units Sold * 2" above, should receive this data always from displayed surface values.
193
Several computed item columns can be added to this Pivot using the "Units Sold" Facts as a source of input data. These computed items are shown below as new columns to the right of the "Units Sold" column (surface values have been disabled in this example):
These new Computed Item columns are evaluated as follows: Units Sold * 2 = Units Sold values multiplied by 2 (i.e. computed item calculation: formula is: Units_Sold * 2) Sqrt Units Sold = Square root of Units Sold values (i.e. computed item calculation formula: Sqrt (Units_Sold) ) ColMax Units Sold = Maximum value of Units Sold in a column (i.e. computed item calculation formula: ColMax (Units_Sold) ) Average Units Sold = Average value of Units Sold (i.e. computed item calculation formula: Avg (Units_Sold) )
194
In the previous example, the "Units Sold * 2" column implicitly requires a single cell value. If it is used in a computed item column with an aggregation data function of Sum, all underlying Table Section values corresponding to this Pivot cell are summed and then multiplied by 2. If you review the "Units * 2" value for Los Angeles, you see that it is evaluated by summing the underlying Table occurrences for Los Angeles and then multiplying this sum by 2. The ColMax computed item function operates on a range of data as opposed to a single value. The Avg computed item function operates on the summed, aggregated values corresponding to a Pivot cell. In the case of Los Angeles, this would be the sum of underlying values for Los Angeles divided by the number of occurrences of these values. This behavior can be most easily seen from the "ColMax Units Sold" column which shows a value of 500 for each cell. The ColMax function interrogates the range of values in an entire column and returns the maximum value found: 500. This is the maximum cell value in the entire "Units Sold" column in the underlying Table Section (compared to 1,100 which is the maximum "Units Sold" value shown in the Pivot display).
As you can see, the "ColMax Units Sold" and "Average Units Sold" Fact columns values have changed. With surface values enabled, the ColMax function refers to the displayed "Units Sold" Fact column for input data and the highest value in this column is 1,100 which is the value that is displayed in the "ColMax Units Sold" column above. The Avg Computed Item function which is used to evaluate the "Average Units Sold" column takes its input from the sum of the displayed "Units Sold" Fact column values and divides this by the number of displayed occurrences of values in the "Units Sold" column - this is 2100/4 which equals 525 - the value displayed in the "Average Units Sold" column. In general when you enable surface values for Pivot Section computed items, they operate on the summed, aggregated values from the underlying Table Section.
195
Since the surface values have been disabled, the values in the Break Total ("Total") cells for each Computed Item column are evaluated by applying the computed item calculation formula to the underlying aggregated Table Section "Units Sold" values summed for all Cities.
With surface values enabled, the various Break Total cell values are evaluated using the displayed values of the "Units Sold" Fact column. For example, the "ColMax Units Sold" total line value has changed (from 500) to 1,100 since the maximum value displayed in the "Units Sold" column is 1,100. The "Average Units Sold" total line value has changed (from 210) to 525 since the displayed sum of "Units Sold" is 2,100 and the displayed number of Cities is 4 leading to an average calculation of 2,100/4 = 525. In either case, whether surface values are enabled or disabled, the computed item Break Total values are calculated by applying the computed item calculation on the Break Total value for the column on which the computed item calculation is based. There exists no facility whereby computed item Break Totals are evaluated by summing (or some other aggregate data function) its constituent displayed Detail cell values. If such a facility were to exist, the "Total" cell for the "ColMax Units Sold" column above would be 4,400 (= 1,100 + 1,100 + 1,100 + 1,100) i.e. the sum of all Detail Fact values in this column.
196
Command Add Selected Items Remove Selected Items Modify Sort Add Totals Add Computed Item Add Cume Data Function Drill Anywhere Drillup Focus On Items Hide Items Show Hidden Items Show All Items Group Items Ungroup Items Restore Name Refresh Data
Description Adds the selected item as a Column Label, Row Label, or Fact. Removes the selected item. Modifies the selected computed item. Reorders the selected item by labels, by values, ascending, or descending. Adds the selected item to the Measures pane. Enables you to add a new data item derived from calculations performed on an existing item. Adds cumulative totals to break totals by dimension and restarts them at each dimensional grouping. Applies a prebuilt data function to the selected item. Enables you to drill to any item. Returns the original view of data that you drilled. Updates the pivot table to include only the selected data. Hides the selected item. Restores the selected hidden item. Updates the pivot table to include all items. Groups the selected dimensions. Ungroups the selected dimension. Restores the original name of a renamed item. Updates the data according to the selected option. Select between After Process, When Section Displayed, Manually, or Refresh Now. Enable surface values, true computed totals, and null facts in computed items.
[Ctrl+G] [Ctrl+U]
Pivot Options
197
198
Chapter Chapter
Charting Data
9
This chapter explains how to use Interactive Reporting Studio charting features to perform interactive analysis of your data in a graphic format.
In This Chapter Chart Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Charting Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Creating Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Selecting a Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Working with Two-dimensional Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Working with Multidimensional Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Manipulating Chart Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Chart Scrolling and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Customizing Chart Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Chart Menu Command Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Charting Data
199
Chart Section
The Chart section enables you to see meaningful summaries of your data. Graphic snapshots help you recognize patterns, trends, and other relationships that might not be apparent in columns and rows of tabular data. The Chart section opens with an initial plot area for the chart. Because chart construction and manipulation is managed with the Data Layout, plotting, viewing, and reviewing are easy and intuitive. Interactive Reporting Studio charts respond dynamically to your commands. When you make a change in a charted item, you see your chart instantly redrawn to reflect the change. Experimenting with different combinations of data can be surprisingly informative.
Chart Title Chart Subtitle Facts (Y) axis label Facts (Y) axis Catalog pane
Legend
Depth(Z) axis Values Depth (Z) axis Label X Axis Label X-axis Values Content pane
Charting Basics
A chart is a graphic representation of data. Except for pie charts, all charts plot data with reference to a horizontal x axis and vertical y axis. Multidimensional charts sometimes plot data on an additional axis. A pie chart uses the metaphor of the pie as a whole to delineate the relative values of the parts or slices. In , you construct a chart by dragging Request items from the Catalog pane to one of the Data Layouts. At least one y axis item must populate an Data Layout to plot a usable chart.
200
Charting Data
Chart Terminology
The following table defines the chart terminology used in Interactive Reporting:
Table 36
Chart Terminology Definition Straight lines on a chart that provide a framework for measurement and reference. Typically, the x axis and z axis are used to display label items, and the y axis shows values or facts (measurable items), such as units and amounts. Graphic indicators that represent data. bar charts display values in either vertical or horizontal bars. Pie charts use wedge-shaped slices to represent values. The area bounded by the axes is called the plot area. In the case of the pie chart, the plot area is defined by a circle representing the totality of all data items. In all charts (except pie charts), planes provide background and graphed reference for charted values. Planes define horizontal, vertical, and background fields for a chart. An information box containing color-keyed labels used to identify different data values represented on a chart. Straight horizontal and vertical lines arranged in scaled increments that provide calibrated guidelines for value interpretation. A linear measure of a value used in bar charts. A spacial measure of a value used in pie charts. Text description related to the entire chart. Additional text used to describe the chart. Text description of the vertical quantity axis. Text or numbers which indicate specific values along the y axis Text description of the horizontal quantity axis. Text or numbers which indicate specific values along the x axis. Text description of the depth axis. Text or number which indicate specific values along the z axis Central chart picture which contains Chart bars, background and also Chart axes. Border which controls the position of the Charts central bars, background and axes labels. The border can be resized and repositioned. Border which controls the general position of all other Chart components not controlled by the Chart graphic border. This border can be resized and repositioned. Optional text strings that can be placed anywhere within the Chart border. Optional label that can be placed to the right of the right-hand vertical edger of the Chart graphic.
Term Axes
Values Plot Area Planes Legend Grid lines Bar Slice Chart top title Chart subtitle Y axis label Y axis values X axis label X axis values Z axis label Z axis values Chart graphic Chart graphic border Chart border Inserted text string Right y axis label
Chart Terminology
201
Table 36
Chart Terminology (Continued) Definition Optional values that can be displayed on the right hand vertical edge of the Chart graphic Optional text which represents numeric value of the bar.
Table 37
Chart Terminology (Pie Specific) Definition Individual y axis value representation for current x axis item. Text to identify x axis item. Line from pie slice label to pie slice to aid in slice identification.
Figure 2
y axis
z axis x axis
Data can either be represented in a two-dimensional or a three-dimensional (2-D or 3-D) space. In two dimensions, data is represented along the x axis and y-axis only, In three dimensions, data is projected back along the z axis also. Two dimensions of data must be represented in 2-D space. At least three dimensions of data are necessary to use the third spatial dimension Stack, Cluster or Depth (z axis). But three or more dimensions of data can be represented in 2-D space. For example, cluster and stack represent data categories in two spatial dimensions (X axis and Y axis only).
202
Charting Data
Chart Terminology
203
Chart Data Layout Description The X- Axis is used for those items that you want to place on the x axis, which is a straight line on the chart. It is used as a qualitative data label for categorizing information. To place items on the x axis, use the X-Axis pane. The Stack Cluster or Depth pane represent the third dimension of data, that is, the z axis that projects out toward you or a location in space. This axis can either be qualitative or quantitative. For a Stack each dimension of data of the charts is represented by only one bar. This bar consists of as many components as the data file has data rows, with the data from each row stacked onto the previous row. For example, a single bar can represent the amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one year on top of a bar representing sales for other years. You can stack the bar charts vertically or horizontally. By stacking items and assigning a different color to each item, you can display trends among comparable or related items, or emphasize visually a sum of several indicators. For a Cluster, data extended in the third dimension is shown as clusters displayed in the foreground. This category creates a vertical column (and only a vertical column) for each data value. If the chart is showing multiple data series, the values are grouped based upon the category value. For example, use clustered bars to compare stores of different types. Alternatively, cluster bars can be used to compare two different values items, such as Amount of Sales and Units Sold. For the Depth, data extends the length of the chart along the z-axis.
The Facts category indicates height in the coordinate system. It is used as a quantitative label as a way of categorizing information on the y axis. For the Fact (Stack) pane each dimension of numeric data is represented by only one bar. and shows the grouping along the y axis. This bar consists of as many components as the data file has numeric rows, with the numeric data from each row stacked onto the previous row. For example, a single bar can represent the amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one year on top of a bar representing sales for other years. You can stack the bar charts vertically or horizontally. By stacking items and assigning a different color to each item, you can display trends among comparable or related items, or emphasize visually a sum of several indicators. For the Fact (Depth) pane, numeric data extends the length of the chart along the z-axis.
204
Charting Data
Creating Charts
Interactive charts consists of two layout elements: graphical elements (for example, chart bars or pie slices) and axis labels. When you assign Request items to the Data Layout, they become values or labels in your chart. The instructions below are a starting point for building charts. As you use and become familiar with the Chart section, you learn ways to create the exact type of chart that fits your needs.
Drag values or facts (such as Units or Amount) in to the y pane in the Data Layout to create bar charts, pie charts or ribbon charts. Drag a label item (such as Name, Product, or State) into the x pane in the Data Layout to create a 2-D chart. Drag a label item to the y pane in Data Layout to add a third dimension to your chart.
To select a chart type, select Format > Chart Type and select a chart type from the menu that is
displayed.
205
Horizontal Stacked bar Vertical Cluster bar Pie Stacked Area Area
3 Drag one or more label items from the Catalog pane to the a pane in the Data Layout.
The Pie chart is differentiated to reflect subcategories. A legend depicting details of the selection is displayed.
Note: Since pie charts plot data using only two axes, the z pane is disabled in the Data Layout when creating a Pie chart.
206
Charting Data
To toggle the position of a pie slice, select a slice of the pie and choose Pull Out Slice on the
shortcut menu. A check mark is displayed on the shortcut menu next to Pull Out Slice to indicate that this feature is active. Select this option again to clear the check mark and restore the pie slice to its original position.
To toggle the display of negative and positive values, select a slice of the pie and select Show
Negative Values on the shortcut menu. A check mark is displayed next to Show Negative Values to indicate that negative values are shown. Select this option again to clear the check mark and show positive values.
Click the rotate icon and move the dotted line to a new location.
207
When you release the mouse button, the chart is redrawn to reflect the adjusted perspective. If you cannot drag the rotate icon in a certain direction, the chart has reached its farthest possible rotation in that direction.
2 Drag a label item from the Catalog pane to the the Data Layout.
Data labels are displayed on the horizontal axis in the Chart area.
3 Drag a value from the Catalog pane to the y pane the Data Layout.
A chart is plotted that summarizes the selected value on the y axis as it relates to the subcategories of the label item x axis. automatically scales the data represented on the y axis and adds appropriate labels. The Legend provides an index of label information with a coordinated color scheme. To use a different 2-D chart format, select another 2-D chart from the Chart drop-down list box.
208
Charting Data
2 Drag a label item from the Catalog pane to the x pane in the Data Layout. 3 Drag a label item from the Catalog pane to the z pane in the Data Layout. 4 Drag a value from the Catalog pane to the y pane in the Data Layout.
A chart is plotted that summarizes the selected value y oabe as it relates to the subcategories of the label items (x axis and z axis).
209
To cluster bars representing two different value items (clustered on the y axis):
1 Select Vertical Cluster Bar from the Chart drop-down list box. 2 Drag two fact items to the y axis and a label item to the x axis.
Stacked bar charts show the relationship of parts to the whole. Stacking techniques differ depending on whether you are representing divisions within data label categories or stacking two separate numeric categories. Stacked bar charts offer similar complexity to clustered bar charts by adding together component value items within chart bars or areas. By stacking items and assigning a different color to each item, you can effectively display trends among comparable or related items, or visually emphasize a sum of several indicators. To create a Stacked bar chart, you need more than one Request item in the Y-Facts in the Data Layout. Each value item adds a segment to the length of the bar.
210
Charting Data
Because area charts do not break data along the horizontal axis, they are most useful for charting three dimensions of data. The z pane should be used to either project data into a third spatial dimension, or to stack two categories of data in a stacked area chart.
211
212
Charting Data
Using Different Scales to Compare Related Values Using Data Functions in Charts Adding Computed Items Sorting Chart Items Creating Pivot Tables from Charts Drilling into Charts Hiding and Focusing on Charted Data
213
For example, you might like to chart the sales of your two fastest growing product lines together to get an idea of how business is growing. However, while the growth rates are similar, the two product lines may sell at entirely different volumes. The chart does not provide much comparative information because each line needs to be charted at a different scale.By using different scales for the two y axes, you can correctly scale each value for the most effective presentation of the data.
To use a different scale for a value on the second y axis, double-click the one of the two values
in the y pane in the Data Layout. automatically changes the scale of the y axis for the value you selected, and italicizes the value name in the Data Layout. Double-click the item again to return the scale to its default setting. For information on manually setting scales for left and right y axis values, see Setting Chart Value Axis Properties on page 230.
Chart Data Functions Description Returns sum of all values. This is the default setting. Returns average of all values. Returns number of values. Returns highest value. Returns lowest value. Returns values as a percentage of all like values in the chart. Returns average of values; null values excluded. Returns number of null values. Returns number of values; null values excluded.
Data Function Sum Average Count Maximum Minimum % of Grand Non-Null Average Null Count Non-Null Count
Note: Null values are empty values for which no data exists. Null values are not equal to zero.
214
Charting Data
3 Define the new data item by building an expression in the Definition text box.
Use the operator buttons to insert arithmetic and logical operators at the insertion point.
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select Request items to place in the equation. Click Functions to apply scalar functions using the Functions dialog box.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace spaces in item names with underscores (_).
4 If necessary, click the Options button to set a new data type for the item. 5 When the equation is complete, click OK.
The computed item is listed in the Data Layout and is added to your chart.
215
4 If desired, select an aggregate function from the Using drop-down list box when sorting by values.
The Using drop-down menu is not available when you sort by labels.
5 If desired, click the ascending or descending Sort button on the Sort line.
The Sort line stores a sort condition for each dimensional item included in the chart.
Sort Items
The sort drop-down menu lists the data items that can be sorted. Each dimensional item included in the chart (name and date) is listed in this menu. Dimensional items can include Pivot column and row labels.
Reference Items
The By drop-down menu lists items used as a basis for a complex sort condition (for example, sorting Cities by the revenue generated in each).
Label By default, dimensional data items is sorted alphabetically by name when you create your chart: this is equivalent to sorting by label. When selected, labels indicates that the item chosen from the Sort list is sorted by label or name, rather than by reference to corresponding numeric data values in the chart Value Sorting by a numeric data item orders each value of the target item chosen from the Sort list by its corresponding numeric value in the Value list.
216
Charting Data
Sorting by values produces an entirely different sort order. For example, your chart may list each state in which your company has made sales revenue and the total cost-of-sales for each. The states are initially listed in alphabetical order. When you sort by cost-of-goods, the states are ranked in order by each corresponding cost-of-sales figure.
Functions
The Using drop-down menu contains aggregate statistical functions that are available when you sort by values. The sort aggregate functions are usually the same as the data functions available in a section. When you sort by values, labels are sorted by the corresponding numeric values of the referenced item (for example, sorting states by the sum total of the cost of goods sold in each state).
To create a pivot table based on your chart, in the Chart section, select Insert > Pivot This
Chart.
The workspace switches to a new Pivot section that displays the pivot table created using the data from the chart.
217
2 Select Chart > Drillup to return to the original view of your chart.
Tip: If no options are available in the Drill Anywhere menu, all Request items have been used in the
Data Layout.
Note: Drill Anywhere is enabled on the General page of Data Model Options. To display the General tab, select DataModel > Data Model Options.
Focusing on Items
To focus on a chart item:
1 Select one or more objects on which you want to concentrate.
Focused item(s) are displayed with a dotted outline.
To return to the original chart display, select Chart > Show All Items.
218
Charting Data
Hiding Items
To hide charted data:
1 In the chart, select the objects that you want to hide.
displays the item(s) with a dotted outline.
Selecting Chart Elements Displaying Axis Grid Lines Inserting Text Changing Chart Legends
219
Inserting Text
You can insert text anywhere around or within the chart to further explain or emphasize a chart component.
To insert text:
1 Select Insert Text on the shortcut menu.
The Set Inserted Text dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the text you want to display in the text box and click OK.
The text is displayed in the location where you initially invoked the Insert Text command.
The following three examples shows how to place the legend on different axes to alter the appearance and data shown by the same chart. In the first example, the legend has been set on the X Axis. In the second example, the legend has been set on the Facts axis. In the third example, the legend has been set on the Z axis:
220
Charting Data
Legend on X-Axis
Legend on -Axis
Legendary-Axis
2 Select the axis on which you want to set the legend and click OK.
Colors are redistributed to highlight the data associated with the selected item and color coordinates corresponding labels in the Legend. From the Legend pull-down menu, click the axis on which you want to position the legend.
2 Drag a sizing handle until the legend is the desired size that you want.
221
Scrolling through Chart Data Rotating and Elevating Charts Smart Scaling Auto Resizing Charts Fitting Charts to Screen
The chart legend displays only items visible in the current view. Scrollbars are not available for the Pie chart type. If all bars can display in one view, the scrollbars are disabled.
222
Charting Data
To rotate the angle of vision or change the elevation of a bar, line, or area chart:
1 Select Chart > Properties.
The Chart Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the General tab to view the General properties page. 3 In the Planes area, select the Show Back Plane check box and click OK. 4 Place your cursor at the top right corner of the chart.
The cursor changes to indicate that you can rotate the chart.
5 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the chart to rotate it.
When you release the mouse button, the chart is redrawn to reflect the adjusted perspective. If you cannot rotate in a certain direction, the chart has reached its farthest possible rotation in that direction.
Smart Scaling
Smart Scaling describes a method for ensuring that chart text label components are intelligently placed in relation to each other so that there is no overlapping, visual obstructions or clipping. Smart Scaling governs:
Initial chart displays size Chart behavior during resizing Ability to move or reposition charts
You apply Smart Scaling to prevent overlapping and clipping of objects. Understanding the initial display, and using the Do Not Remove Text and Minimum Font as modifiers are key to the Smart Scaling algorithm. Smart Scaling is enabled on the General tab of the Chart Properties. By default, Smart Scaling is enabled.
223
Initial Display
Smart Scaling relies on a display hierarchy or a draw order when it determines what is displayed. The display hierarchy is based on the number of components and the initial size of the chart boundary. The display hierarchy for the Chart sections is as follows. Bar, Line and Area charts have this display order:
Planes Bar/Lines/Ribbons Stack, Cluster and Depth values X axis values Fact, Fact (Stack) and Fact (Depth) axis values Legend Titles Axis Inserted text
As you add or modify various Chart label components, Smart Scaling uses the hierarchy to determine which components to add or omit when placing items. For example, in a Pie Chart where several small slices are in the same vicinity of each other, some of the pie slice labels might typically overlap due to simple space allocations. If you have Smart Scaling enabled, some of the slice labels are simply not drawn when crowded conditions are encountered. If a current label overlaps an existing label, then the label is skipped and the next label is drawn. You can correct this by moving the label slice.If there is enough room for other labels to display unobstructed when the label slices are repositioned, additional labels are displayed. You can also enable the Line to Label feature to enhance the slice-label relationship, and identify and place items easier.
Retaining Text
When a chart object is reduced disproportionately to other objects in the bounding area and Smart Scaling is enabled, text may be eliminated based on the display hierarchy. You can prevent text from being removed by enabling the Do not remove text option available on the General tab of Chart properties. In the case where a chart object is reduced too much, text is preserved, but may overlap other object or appear distorted
224
Charting Data
When the component is first reduced, it continues to show the original font size and not the user defined font size. If the minimum font size is reached for the supported components and it is still too large to fit with obstructing or being obstructed, then the item is removed from display. When Smart Scaling is used in conjunction with Auto Resize, changes to the Chart size are limited to all those methods which do not involve the movement of the chart border. If you select the handles of the chart border and reposition them as the method to resize the Chart when Smart Scaling and Auto Resize are enabled, Auto Resize is automatically disabled. The Smart Scaling property remains enabled.
225
Smart Scaling On
Drag the handles of the chart border, which redraws the chart to fit the new border dimensions, Enable the Auto Resize option on the General tab of Chart Properties.This feature automatically expands the chart border to fit the maximum height or width of the Contents pane. Enable the Auto Resize property and adjust the size of the entire Designer application by dragging the corner the application window. This redraws the chart components automatically.
226
Charting Data
Enable the Auto Resize property and adjust the size of the Contents pane by adjusting the Section/Catalog pane border. This redraws the chart components automatically. Enable the Auto Resize property and show or hide the Outline and or Sort line.
Resizing a chart can result in the overlap of chart components, especially when a chart is reduced in size. To prevent this overlap, you can use the Smart Scaling and Minimum Font Size features (both described above). By default, Auto Resizing is enabled.
2 Click the General tab to view the General properties. 3 Select the Auto Resize check box and click OK.
To fit a chart to the Contents pane, click the Fit to Screen icon.
Setting Line Chart Data Labels Properties Setting Chart Label Axis Properties Setting Chart Value Axis Properties Setting Bar Chart Properties Setting Chart Label Axis Properties Setting Chart Value Axis Properties Setting Bar Chart Properties Setting Line Chart Patterns Properties Setting Line Chart Data Labels Properties
227
Show title Toggles the display of the chart title as entered in the text field. Show subtitle Toggles the display of a subtitle as entered in the text field. Show legend Toggles the display of color-coded Chart legends in the Chart area. Show border Toggles the display of a border around the chart. The border controls the general position of all other Chart components not controlled by the Chart graphic border. This border can be resized and repositioned. Show partial view indicator Toggles the display of the Partial View indicator in the top left corner of the Contents pane. The indicator shows if not all bars are displayed in the current view. The indicator is displayed on all output media, including Designer, Workspace, PDF and print). 3-D objects Toggles the 3-D display of chart objects, including pie slices, chart bars, side planes, and perspective view. Print/PDF all views Toggles the print of the entire rendered chart. The setting you specify here is not applied to the Export to PDF option in the Workspace.
228
Charting Data
Auto Resize Toggles the automatic resizing of a chart within the Content pane whenever the Chart is resized. Smart Scaling Toggles the Smart Scaling feature, which governs how Chart components are initially displayed, how they behave during Chart resizing and how the Chart components can be moved or repositioned. Do not remove text Toggles the do not remove text. When this feature is enabled, Smart Scaling (see above) does not remove any text (it does not clip or overlap text if an object is resized or repositioned to a minimum font size.). This feature is checked for new Chart sections, and unchecked for 8.3 releases and earlier that have Smart Scaling enabled. Inserted text and legends are not affected by your selection in this field. Smart Scaling may shrink these objects, but they are never scaled to the point where they are eliminated entirely. Min Font Size Toggles the minimum font size feature for text labels when the overall Chart size is changed and Smart Scaling (see above) is enabled. If it not possible to fit a component in the available space, the font size is reduced by one point and a redraw is attempted. The font size reduction process repeats until the component can fit within the components boundary or until the font size specified here is reached. If the component is still too large to fit without obstructing another object, or it is obstructed, then the component is removed from the display. The default minimum font size is 8. Use legacy colors for data points Enables an individual Chart to use legacy colors from the Release 8.3 and earlier Color Palette. When this option is unchecked, the newly added Chart uses the default colors from the 8.4 and later Color Palette. To enable all Charts to use the legacy colors from the Release 8.3 and earlier Color Palette, check the Use legacy colors for data points option on the Default Fonts and Styles box. This option is saved with other options at the application level. For more information about this option, see Customizing Chart Colors on page 234. Planes Toggles the display of horizontal, vertical, and back planes of a chart. Horizontal\ Vertical rotation degrees Shift the perspective angle or elevation (60 to 60 degrees) for all types except the pie chart, which has its own rotation (see below) Rotation For pie charts, rotates the pie the specified number of degrees (between -90 and 90), and changes the pie height the specified number of degrees (0 to 90). For all other charts except line charts, shifts the horizontal and/or vertical angel or elevation a specified number of degrees (between -60 and 60).
229
2 Click the Labels Axis tab to display the Labels Axis properties.
3 Modify the properties shown as desired and click OK to apply your changes.
Horizontal\ Vertical rotation degrees Select to display x axis and z axis labels, tickmarks, and values, and whether the intervals at which x axis labels and tickmarks display is automatically determined by or manually set to the specified value. Expand label box Increases the label box size for anx axis label (y and z labels are unaffected) in an individual Chart. It is only active when the Show Label check box is enabled and the Auto Frequency check box is disabled. It is not available for pie charts. This feature is used primarily for sequential labels, for example, time, day or number labels. For regular name-based labels, this feature should be disabled so that the user can view each label name. Scrolling Set the number of bars to display per view if multiple views that are enabled for a rendered Chart.
2 Click the Values Axis tab to display the Values Axis properties page.
230
Charting Data
3 Modify the properties shown as desired and click OK to apply your changes.
You can display labels, tickmarks at intervals, and values at intervals for primary and secondary value axes. Allow adjustable scaling for faster performance Select this field to calculate the min/max (Y) range based on the first two thousand bars.As you scroll through this range (moving to the right [X] or back [Z]}, of if any bar is above the maximum or below the minimum, the Y scale is expanded to all bars. If this feature is unchecked, the min/max range is calculated based on all bars. You may also set the left axis and right axis scales using a logarithmic scale, which plots line charts with logarithmic (base 10) values; and whether the values displayed on the scale are automatically set by Interactive Reporting, or set by manually specifying minimum and maximum values. For the left axis scale, you may specify the interval at which to separate axis values or have Interactive Reporting automatically assign the interval. If all bars are displayed in a view (the chart scrolling is off), the true minimum and maximum are calculated. If you print a chart when all views are active, the minimum/maximum range is calculated based on all bars.
Note: If you plot a line chart with a logarithmic (base 10) value axis, any chart values less than one (1) are represented as zero (0) on the logarithmic scale and an information message is displayed on the Windows status bar.
2 Click the Bar Chart tab to display the Bar Chart properties page.
231
3 Modify the properties shown as desired and click OK to apply your changes.
All Bar Charts Toggles the display of values on each bar in the chart. Clustered Bar Charts Clusters bars by items on the Fact axis (Y-axis) or X Axis. For example, if you have Quarter on the Y-axis, each cluster consists of four bars, one for each quarter. Bar-Line Charts Toggles the display of values on bars and for lines, and the inclusion of null values (which disrupt the line, area, or ribbon). Zero (0) values are included. You can also place line chart plot points to the left of or centered on bars, and stack or cluster bars on the Y-axis.
Changing Chart Color Schemes and Fill Patterns Changing Chart Data Labels Changing the Color of Chart Elements, Lines, and Text
232
Charting Data
A Properties dialog box is displayed that may contain one or more tabs (Patterns, Axis, Data Labels), depending on the format of the active chart.
2 Click the Patterns tab to display the Patterns tab. 3 Select the fill pattern and color for the chart segment, line, or marker and click OK.
Automatic Automatically sets the fill pattern and color to the default setting. The default setting for fill pattern is Solid. The default setting for color varies between chart formats. None Sets a transparent fill pattern and color for the selected element. Custom Enables you to select a foreground color and fill pattern for the chart. Choices include Solid, Hollow, Horizontal, Vertical, Cross, Diagonally Up, Diagonally Down, Diagonally Cross. For line charts, you can also select the width, style and color of lines, and the size, style, border colors, and fill colors of markers.
2 Click the Data Labels tab to display the Data Labels tab. 3 Select the fill pattern and color for the chart segment, line, or marker.
Pie Charts Select whether to show pie slice labels, values, percentages, negative values, and lines that connect a data label to its pie slice. Bar Charts Select whether to show individual bar values and the placement of the values inside the bar. Line Charts Select whether to show values and ignore null values, and select the placement of the values relative to the line.
For line charts, you can also use the Axis page to specify whether to plot values on the primary (left) axis or secondary (right) axis.
233
The legacy color palette consists of the first six rows in the color palette. The default color palette consists of the last two rows. There are seventeen chart default colors and the chart background color is the last color on the bottom row. The numbers below are the hexadecimal numbers for the rgb codes in the default Color Palette. The numbers map to the colors from left to right in the default Color Palette.
ZColor(30583, 30840, 58596), ZColor(63479, 48830, 9766), ZColor(1542, 52428, 52685), ZColor(46517, 23387, 42405), ZColor(19018, 53456, 24929), ZColor(65535, 60395, 0), ZColor(52428, 13107, 13107), ZColor(39321, 39321, 39321), ZColor(63222, 13878, 41891), Scalar(7710, 28013, 11308), ZColor(61680, 65535, 26728), ZColor(39321, 0, 39321), ZColor(39321, 65535, 39321), ZColor(47031, 31097, 9252), ZColor(62965, 43690, 54741),
234
Charting Data
235
In the next example, the bar chart uses the colors from the Default Color Palette:
236
Charting Data
Table 40
Command Sort Data Function Add Computed Item Modify Computed Item Remove Selected Items Drill Anywhere Drillup Focus On Items Hide Item Show Hidden Items Show All Items Group Items Ungroup Items Restore Name Properties
Description Sorts the selected column values in ascending order (alphabetical or numeric). Applies a prebuilt data function to the selected item. Enables you to add a new data item derived from calculations performed on an existing item. Enables you to modify a computed item. Removes the selected items. Enables you to drill to any item. Returns the original view of the data you drilled. Updates the chart to include only the selected items. Hides the selected item from view. Restores the selected hidden item. Updates the chart to include all items removed by focusing. Groups the selected items. Ungroup the selected grouped item. Restores the original name of a renamed item. Opens the Properties dialog box for the chart or selected chart element.
237
238
Charting Data
Chapter
Report Designer
10
In This Chapter Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Creating a Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Working with a Report Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Setting Up a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Enhancing Report Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Using Multiple Data Sources in a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Creating Smart Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Formatting Report Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Converting Detail Reports from Versions Earlier than 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Report Designer
239
Report Section
In the Report section, the Report Designer helps you to easily develop a complete range of reports, from small ad-hoc reports to mission-critical operational reports. After you create your database query, you can use this visual layout capabilities of the section to drag and drop columns, expressions, charts, pivot tables, logos, and graphic objects to quickly design and customize your reports.
Expression Line Accessed by way of the Expression button on the Section title bar, the Expression line enables you to build common computed expressions using JavaScript. Catalog pane Contains all of the of drag-and-drop elements that you use to create a custom report, including:
Query Contains all the sections associated with a selected query, including Results, Pivot, and Chart sections. You can drag individual Results columns from the Results and Table sections to a report page, as well as entire Pivot and Chart sections to create Smart Reports. Graphics Contains standard vector graphics text labels, and pictures (bitmaps only). Fields Contains predefined fields that can be dragged to various areas of the report to enhance the look and feel of the report.
To use any of these elements, simply drag them to the desired report component band.
Data Layout Consists of the Groups Data Layout and Table Data Layout. The Table Data Layout is divided into the Dimension and Fact panes.
Groups Data Layout Defines the overall or highest levels used to group data in a report. When you designate an item to serve as a group header (also known as a break value), you are instructing Interactive Reporting Studio to organize the rest of the data in repeating collections of records according to the group header. Dimensions pane in Table Data Layout Includes descriptive information such as a column in a table that is included in the body of the report. Facts pane in Table Data Layout Includes the measurable or quantifiable data as a column in a table included in the body of the report. Interactive Reports calculates and inserts subtotals for each fact column.
Interactive Reporting quantifies values by group header and dimension. If you have a descriptive numeric value that should not be calculated, such as Retail Price or Target Sales, use it as a group header or table dimensions instead of a fact.
240
Report Designer
Align Aligns several objects at the same time. Objects are aligned to the first object you select. Select the first object, then hold down the Control key and select the remaining objects. Click the arrow on the Align icon and select an alignment option: left, center, right, top, middle, or bottom. Make Same Size Resizes the selected objects to the same size. Objects are resized to match the first object you select. Select the first object, then hold down the Control key and select the remaining objects. Click the arrow on the Make Same Size icon and select a resizing option: width, height, or both. Layer Stacks a single object in relative position to other objects. Layer includes four rearrangement options: Send To Front, Send To Back, Bring Forward, and Send Backward. Use this feature to layer multiple objects so that only the sections of the objects you want visible are shown. Spring Objects Maintains relative vertical spacing between dynamic objects. That is, you can spring one object to another so that if the first object is moved, increased or diminished, the second object moves in the same flow. Select an object, then hold down the Control key and select the remaining objects. Click the Spring Objects icon to spring the objects. To remove spring from objects, select the objects click the Spring Objects icon again.
Zoom Sets the magnification level of the report. Options include whole page, page width, or a percentage of magnification based on 100%.
Expression Line
Use the Expression Line to apply and display aggregate functions and computing fields. For each item in a report, you can display its JavaScript syntax and modify it to fit your own needs.
Data Function Shows available data functions that can be applied to table columns. Cancels and removes a formula. This icon is displayed only when you enter syntax.
Accepts and applies the formula. This icon is displayed only when you enter syntax.
Edit bar Used to display, enter, and edit a Javascript expression.
Expression Syntax
Table 5-1 lists the default syntax for Report section items.
Report Section
241
Table 41
Column Name refers to the dimensional column name. The column name can be modified. Table Fact
Tables["Section"].Columns ["Column Name"].Sum[currBreak]
Section Name refers to either the Results or Table section. Column Name refers to the fact column name. Sum refers to the return of underlying values and can also be an applied Data functions such as Avg, Max, and Min. Group Label
CurrBreak.Value["Column Name"]
Column Name refers to the dimension or fact column name. Group Fact
Tables["Section"].Columns ["Column Name"].Sum[currBreak]
Section Name refers to either the Results or Table section. Column Name refers to the fact column name. To apply a break at the parent level (the highest level), use the following syntax:
Tables["Section Name"] .Columns ["Column"].Sum[currBreak. Parent]
You can concatenate the syntax listed in Table 5-1 with other JavaScript expressions to customize the content of labels, facts, and dimensions. For example, if you wanted a group header to show a union of the Total label and the amount, you could insert a field in the Expression line to concatenate Total with the table fact syntax.
Or, you could insert a field to show the sum (or any other data function) of the column divided by the sum of the parent level expressed as a percentage.
If you plan to use this feature, add the labels in a computed field. For information on how to add a computed field, see Adding Computed Items on page 5-34.
242
Report Designer
2 If desired, select Report > Section Boundaries to view the bands for the report components.
If the Table Data Layout is not visible, click Table on the Section title bar to open the Table Data Layout.
3 Drag Results items from the Query sections of the Catalog pane to the Table Data Layout.
Tip: The Table Data Layout has two panes Dimensions and Facts. Use the Dimensions pane to
build dimension (label) columns, such as Month, Region, or Product Line. Use the Facts pane to build the facts (numeric values) in the report, such as Amount Sales or Units Sold. Results and Table items added to the Facts pane are totaled automatically.
Report Components
The Report Designer offers a variety of dynamic tools for constructing the report you want to create with all of the components you want it to contain. Understanding how these components perform and how they integrate with Report section elements is fundamental to building a successful report. Report pages are structured areas, or bands, of information. Each band contains a different report component and can be customized to include other report elements such as graphic objects, predefined fields, computed fields, charts, and pivot tables.
Body
Page Footer
243
Body Contains one or more tables whose contents are based on the items listed in the Table Dimensions and Table Facts panes of the Data Layout. Every report has a body that holds a table of data. Tables can be based on the same or different results sets within the document. Report Group Headers Categorize data into repeating collections of records organized according to the header band. Report Header/Footer Fully customizable summary bands of information. Report headers print only on the very first page of the report. Report footers print only on the very last page. Page Header/Footer Contain data that is repeated on every page, such as page numbers. These bands are also fully customizable.
Table Column Formatting Options Description To modify the column title, click Expression on the Section title bar, then select the column title that you want to modify. In the Expression line, type the new title between the quotation marks ( ) and click the check mark. To toggle the display of column titles, select Column Titles on the shortcut menu. A check mark is displayed next to Column Titles to indicate that column titles are visible. Select this option again to clear the check mark and hide column titles from view. To remove a selected column from the report (and Table Data Layout), select Remove Column on the shortcut menu. This option is available for dimension and fact columns. Items should be removed with caution as computed items may draw data values from the deleted item. To toggle the display of column totals, select Show Column Totals on the shortcut menu. A check mark is displayed next to Column Totals to indicate that column totals are visible. Select this option again to clear the check mark and hide column totals from view. This option is available only for fact columns.
Options Changing the Column Name Heading (Title) Hide/Show Column Name Heading (Title) Remove Column
Click anywhere inside the column. To suppress the duplicate values for a column, select the column and select Format > Suppress Duplicates. Use this feature if you want to display only the first instance in the column of a duplicate value when individual database records include redundant information. This feature is especially useful if records are associated with the same date, location or customer. To wrap text within a column, select the column and select Format > Text Wrap.
Text Wrap
244
Report Designer
Table 42
Table Column Formatting Options (Continued) Description To sort column values, click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending on the Table menu, shortcut menu, or standard toolbar. If you want the columns in the table to be displayed in a different order, drag the item in order of how you want it to be displayed in the Table Data Layout. You can also select the column in the actual report and drag it to a new position in the report.
2 In the Body band, left-click and hold your left mouse button to position your cursor where you want to
insert the table, and then drag to create the table.
3 Drag the Results items from the Query sections of the Catalog pane to the Table2 Data Layout.
Each new table that you insert has its own corresponding dimensions and facts pane in the Table Data Layout.
245
2 Drag the item on which you want to group data from the Catalog pane to the Report Group1 field in the
Groups Data Layout.
categorize data into repeating collections of records in a header band, based on the Results columns in the Groups Data Layout.
3 Type the information to be displayed in the report header or footer, or drag objects from the Catalog pane
to the Report Header or Report Footer band.
3 Type the information to be displayed in the report header or footer, or drag objects from the Catalog pane
to the Page Header or Page Footer band.
in your report by typing the following code in the Expression Line for the page header object:
if (PageNm == 1) {' '} else {Query Processed: +Format(newDate(), d-mmm-yyyy)};
246
Report Designer
Working with Graphic Elements Working with Fields Working with Computed Fields Inserting Filter Values
247
Table 43
Report Section Graphic Elements Description Creates a line that you can rotate. Creates a horizontal line. Creates a vertical line. Creates a rectangle. Creates a rectangle with rounded corners. Creates an oval. Creates a text label that you can use as a caption. Enables you to insert bitmaps (.bmp extension). Sets the name of the object. Enables the object to be visible during run mode. Use this to hide objects. Locks an object. Use this to lock objects so they cannot be changed.
Element Line Hz Line Vt Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Oval Text Label Picture Name Visible Locked
Expand the folder in the Catalog pane that contains the desired graphic object; then, drag and drop the object into the Contents pane. Select Report > Insert Graphic, select a graphic object from the menu that is displayed, and click the Contents pane to insert the graphic.
Report Section Fields Description Inserts a computed field. Inserts a selected query filter. Inserts a selected result filter.
248
Report Designer
Table 44
Report Section Fields (Continued) Description Inserts the last SQL sent to the database when you process a query. Inserts a page number. Inserts the total number of pages. Note the following behavior of this field when the section is deployed in the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace: If you intend to use this field in a report deployed in the Hyperion System 9 BI + Workspace, any Report section which is more than one page shows as 'Page 1 of y'. It continues to show the pages as such (with an unknown 'y' value) until the end user navigates to the last page of the section. If an end user navigates to the last page using the SHIFT+toolbar button" combination, all pages are generated and the page # toolbar icon tool tip shows the correct page position and total page value. Subsequent navigation continue to show correctly the current and total page numbers. These values persist for the entire user session. If the Report sections has fields in the section which show 'Page x of y', the fields match the page # toolbar icon tool tip. All pages are generated if the Report section is exported to XLS or PDF formats. If the Interactive Reporting document is saved without Results which the Report section references, processing the Interactive Reporting document file causes a generation of the first page only.
Last Saved Last Printed Date Time Date & Time Date Now Time Now Date & Time Now File Name Path Name Report Name
Inserts date on which the report was last saved in MM/DD/YYYY format. Inserts date on which the report was last printed in MM/DD/YYYY format. Inserts and stamps the current date in MM/DD/YYYY format. Inserts and stamps current time in HH:MM:SS format. Inserts and stamps date and time in MM/DDYYYY and HH:MM:SS format. Inserts the current date in MM/DD/YYYY format. Inserts the current time in HH:MM:SS format. Inserts the current date and time in MM/DDYYYY and HH:MM:SS format. Inserts an Interactive Reporting document (.bqy) name. Inserts the full path name of the document. Inserts the report name.
249
2 Left-click and hold your left mouse button to position your cursor in the report component where you want
to insert the field, and then drag to create the table.
3 Click the empty field to select it, and then enter JavaScript syntax in the Expression line.
You can copy and paste JavaScript syntax from existing report items into the Expression line to build the expression. To do this, select an existing item and copy the syntax in the Expression line. Then select the new field and paste the syntax into the Expression line.
4 When you have defined the equation, click the check icon
The field displays the computed value.
2 Left-click and hold your left mouse button to position your cursor in the report component where you want
to insert the filter field, and then drag to create the field.
3 In the Query or Result Sections list, select the section that contains the filters that you want to show.
A list of applied filters populates the Filter Names list.
4 Select the Filter Name that you want to use from the Filter Names list.
To show the operator used in the expression, select the Include Filter Operator check box.
5 Click OK.
250
Report Designer
Column name
Displaying Rulers
Horizontal and vertical rulers help you line up items based on precise units of measure. Available units of measurement include inches, centimeters, and pixels, which you select by clicking the Measurement icon at the intersection of the top and left rulers.
Using Grids
Use the layout grid to snap all objects to the closest grid spot automatically.
251
If rulers are visible, click the ruler and drag one or more design guides from both the horizontal and vertical rulers.
To toggle the display of design guides, select Report > Design Guides.
A check mark is displayed next to Design Guides to indicate they are visible. Select the option again to clear the check mark and remove the design guides.
Setting Up a Report
Use the Report Page Setup command to specify report page parameters including, page size, margins, and columns. Review the following sections for information on:
2 Click the Page Size tab to view the Page Size page. 3 Select the page dimension option you want to use and click OK.
Use Printer Dimensions Determines the printable area based on your printer. If you want to only print the report, select the option. Use Custom Dimensions Enables you to specify the width and height of your report page. If you export reports to HTML pages, you can use this setting to control the number of pages that are included in each HTML file. Each page is exported to a single HTML file by default. To ensure that all pages in your report are contained in a single HTML file, set the page height to a large number.
252
Report Designer
2 Click the Margins tab to view the Margin page. 3 Enter the Top, Bottom, Left and Right margin sizes and click OK.
Margins are measured in units of inches, pixels or centimeters. To change the margin units, click the Measurement icon located above the Content pane until you find the measurement unit that you want to use.
2 Click the Column tab to view the Column page. 3 Select the number of columns that you want to include on the page.
If you want to include more than four columns on the page, enter the number of columns in the Other field. The column width and spacing are determined automatically based on the number of columns specified, the page size, and the page margins. Column width and spacing measurements are set in either inches, pixels, or centimeters.
Setting Up a Report
253
Sorting Report Items Adding Computed Items Applying Data Functions Hiding and Focusing on Reported Data
To apply sort conditions using the Sort line for report group labels:
1 If the Sort line is not already displayed, click Sort on the Section title bar.
The Sort line is displayed below the Section title bar.
3 Drag a report group label from the content area to the Sort line. 4 Double-click the name of the report group label on the Sort line to toggle between ascending and
descending sort order.
2 Click anywhere within the table column (dimension or fact) in the Content pane. 3 Drag table dimensions or table facts from the Content pane to the Sort line. 4 Reorder the Sort items to determine the nested sort order. 5 Double-click the item in the Sort line to toggle between ascending and descending sort orders.
254
Report Designer
2 In the Column Name field, type a name that describes the computation.
The default name is Computed.
3 In the Item pane, select the Request column from which to compute the new data item.
Note that the columns available for reference are only the columns that exist in the results set that is the source for the rest of the table.
4 Modify the existing syntax of the table column you selected or define a new computed item by building an
expression in the Formula pane.
Interactive Reporting uses JavaScript to compute data items. The JavaScript engine supported in Interactive Reporting does not accept European or non-US number formats for computing data items. More information about JavaScript can be found in the Interactive Reporting Object Model and Dashboard Development Services Developers Guide, Volume 1: Dashboard Design.
255
Prebuilt Data Functions in Report section Description Returns the table column name. Returns sum of underlying values. This is the default data function. Returns average of underlying values. Returns number of underlying values. Returns highest of underlying values. Returns lowest of underlying values. Returns group total percentage of the value. Returns number of nulls among underlying values. Returns number of underlying values; null values are excluded. Returns average of underlying values; null values are excluded.
Data Function Column Name Sum Average Count Maximum Minimum % of Category Null Count Non-Null Count Non-Null Average
256
Report Designer
2 Select a break column from the At Every Break in drop-down list box. 3 Select the data function you want to apply from the Break Total Function drop-down list box.
See Applying Data Functions on page 5-35 for a list of data functions that you can use with break totals.
4 Select one or more columns on which to display the break total and click OK.
To understand this difference between underlying and surface values, consider a simple table with two values of 20 and 30. Each of these is already a total of underlying values (20 = 8 +12 and 30 = 10 + 20). An average of the underlying value yields the result of 12.5 = (8 + 12 + 10 + 20) /4). An average of the surface value An average of the surface values yields the results 25 = (20 +30) / 2). The True Total Computation enables you to standardize how total values in a computed column are calculated. When this feature is enabled, all total values are calculated based on the columns data function applied to the surface values. When this feature is disabled, all totals are calculated based on the underlying formula of the column. Pre Release 8.3.2 tables (legacy) tables use the calculation method where one total is calculated by the underlying computed item formula for its computation, and the other total applies the columns data function to the surface values. You can change this behavior by also using the True Total Computation feature. For legacy computed item columns, the True Total Computation feature shows the text Legacy Total Computation on the shortcut menu. This indicates that the column is using the inconsistent legacy total/break total computations.
257
To use true totals for the table total or break total in a computed column:
1 Select the computed column to which you want to apply the true total. 2 On the shortcut menu, select True Total Computation.
When the True Total Computation is deselected, totals and break totals are computed using the underlying formula of the column.
To use true totals for the legacy table total or break total in a computed column:
1 Select the legacy computed column to which you want to apply the true total. 2 On the shortcut menu, select Legacy Total Computation.
When you select a column, Legacy Total Computation is displayed on the shortcut menu. This means that the column is using an inconsistent total/break total computation. Selecting the Legacy Total Computation from the shortcut menu disables the feature. An Alert dialog box indicates that the change cannot be undone: This action cannot be undone. Are you sure you want to use True Total Computations for Total and Break Totals?
3 Click Continue.
True Totals are enabled for both Totals and Break Totals of this column. The next time that you display the shortcut menu, True Total Computation is displayed as an option in place of Legacy Total Computation. At this point, you can no longer apply the legacy behavior to this column.
Focusing on Items
To focus on a report item:
1 Select a group header and select Report > Focus On Item.
Interactive Reporting updates the report to focus on the data. A drill icon Data Layout next to the column you selected. is displayed in the
258
Report Designer
To return to the original chart display, select Chart > Show All Items.
Hiding Items
Use this feature when you need to hide a selected item.
To hide a group item, select a group header and select Report > Hide Item.
You can only select one group item to hide at a time. Interactive Reporting updates the report to hide the data. A drill icon Data Layout next to the column that you selected to hide. is displayed in the
To restore all hidden groups, Select Report > Show Hidden Items.
All items listed in the Data Layout are fully restored to view. The drill icon is displayed.
Report group headers require a common value that belongs to all results or table sets be included in the report. If you introduce a unique value belonging to one results or table set, nothing is returned for any band below that group header. Table Dimensions items can originate from only one data source. Values from multiple data sources can be included in Table Facts. The Results column that you place as a table determines the Facts used. For example, you have two Results sets:
Region East West Sales 10 20 Results 2 Region East West South Units 100 200 400
Results 1
259
If you place Region from Results 1 into the Table Dimension and then drop Results 1: Sales and Results 2: Units into the Table Facts, you get the following table:
Region East West Sales 10 20 Units 100 200
Note that the data from Results 2: South is not included. Smart charts and pivot tables added to a multiple data source report are subject to the same restrictions as described above.
Verify item data types and associated data values in source documents so that you know how to correlate them when creating the reports. Build the Request line, and add server and local filters, data functions, and computations to the query as needed.
button of the Results or Table set that you want to include in your
5 If necessary, click Groups on the Section title bar to open the Group Data Layout.
A group header categorizes data into repeating collections of records in a header band.
6 If necessary, click Table on the Section title bar to open the Table Data Layout.
The Table Data Layout shows two panes: Table Dimensions and Table Facts. Use the Table Dimensions pane to build the column dimensions (labels) in the report. Use the Table Facts pane to build the numeric values in the report.
7 Build the group header band by dragging the item(s) from the Results sections of the Catalog pane to the
Groups Data Layout.
8 Build the column dimensions of the report, drag the item(s) from the Query sections of the Catalog pane to
the Table Dimensions in Data Layout pane.
9 Build the column numeric values of the report by dragging the item(s) from the Query sections of the
Catalog pane to the Table Facts in Data Layout pane.
260
Report Designer
pivot table in its home section, the Smart report is updated and the changes are reflected in the Report section.
2 Size the pivot table or chart by clicking the embedded report until handles are displayed.
The pointer changes to a two-sided arrow.
Report Formatting Options Description To modify the way numbers, dates and currency are displayed, select the item and select Format > Number. When the Number tab are displayed, apply any desired changes. To modify the appearance of a report item, select the item and select Format > Style > Option. Options include bold, underline, italic, and so on To modify the way an item is justified within a row or column, select an item, select Format > Justify > Option. Options include left, center, right, top, middle, and bottom. To modify the font of a report item, select the item and select Format > Font. When the Font tab of the is displayed, apply any desired changes. Instructs not to split a band when a break is encountered. When a break is encountered, the entire band is moved to the next page. Instructs Interactive Reporting to keep bands within a group together when paginating a report. If the lower band cannot fit on the page when the report is paginated, both bands are moved to the following page.
Format Number Style Alignment / Justify Font Keep Together Keep With Next
261
Display Differences
The page margins of a report created by the conversion process may be displayed smaller than in the original Detail report. This is because the new Report section is a WYSIWYG display that includes the unprintable area that exists outside of report margins. In version 5.x, Detail reports did not display or store information about the unprintable area. You can manually adjust the margin sizes in the converted report if needed. If a Detail report contains multiple page header and footer sections, the current version of the product resolves these to a single page header and footer section during the conversion process. The height of the headers and footers in the converted report is equal to the combined heights of all headers and footers in the original Detail report. This may cause graphic and text objects in the headers and footers to overlap. You should manually adjust the properties, size, and/or position of these objects as necessary.
262
Report Designer
Conversion of Facts
During report conversion, Detail report facts are added to the right of the dimension columns in the body section table. Number formats applied to Detail report facts are migrated to the converted report. If no number format exists, then the default number formats are applied to date, time, and number fields. Because version 6.x uses JavaScript as the scripting, the conversion process does not automatically convert any computed facts contained in the Detail report. For computed items located in the Detail report body, the expression is omitted from the version 6.x table object. The conversion process may attempt to replace the computed column with another fact. If that occurs, simply delete the extraneous column. For computed items located in a group header or footer, the code of the old scripting language expression is placed in a text field in the associated header/footer area to aid in manual conversion. Before you correct these placeholder items, Hyperion displays an error message in the field which reads <string>(1):unterminated string literal. The Detail reports Surface Math option has no equivalent in the converted report and is ignored.
263
Command Design Guides Grid Rulers Section Boundaries Page Margins Sort Data Function Add Computed Item Break Total Focus On Items Hide Item Show Hidden Items Show All Items Insert Table Insert Field Insert Predefined Field Insert Graphic Picture Remove Selected Items
Description Toggles the display of design guides. Toggles the display of grid lines. Toggles the display of rulers. Toggles the display of section boundaries (bands). Toggles the display of page margins Sorts the selected column values in ascending order (alphabetical or numeric). Applies a prebuilt data function to the selected item. Opens the Insert Computed Item dialog box. Opens the Insert Break Total dialog box. Updates the report to include only the selected data. Hides the selected item from view. Restores the selected hidden item. Updates the report to include all items removed by focusing. Inserts a blank table in the report. Inserts a blank field in the report. Inserts a predefined field in the report. Inserts a vector graphic in the report. Inserts a picture in the report. Removes the selected item from the report.
[Del]
264
Report Designer
Table 47
Description Toggles the display of report and page headers and footers. Opens the Report Page Setup dialog box for adjusting page size, margins, and columns.
265
266
Report Designer
Chapter
Using Filters
11
This chapter explains how to use filters in the Query and Results sections to refine data for more intelligent analysis and filter away the data you do not need. Review the following topics for information on:
In This Chapter About Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Setting Simple Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Setting Compound Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Setting Variable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Customizing Filters Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Filtering Data in a Table Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Multiple Filters and the Meta Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Filtering Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using Filters
267
About Filters
When building a query, you usually do not want to see information on every product you sell. Instead, you want to see information that relates only to a specific product or product line. Similarly, you probably do not want to see this information for every year the product has been available, but only for recent periods. When you set a filter in the Query section, data is returned from the database only if it meets the specified conditions. For instance, suppose you only want to see customers who spend more than $400,000 per year, or who buy gardening products in the Midwest. By applying a filter you are instructing the database to give me only the data which satisfies the following conditions (sales > $400,000; or, state is in Midwest Region and Product Line = Garden). For example, a filter placed on Item Type (which includes an = (equal) operator and value Keyboard) returns only records associated with keyboard sales. Records associated with all other products are excluded from the Results set. The data set could be expanded to include modem sales records by adding the value Modem to the filter expression. Similarly, the filter > 5000 applied to the Amount Sold item filters out all sales transactions less than or equal to $5,000. Alternately, the expression between 5000, 10000 would exclude transactions above $10,000 and eliminate any below or equal to 5,000.
268
Using Filters
Filter Line
Using filters involves dragging an item from the Content pane to the filter line and then setting filters in Filter. The Filter line is a drag-and-drop command line similar to the Request and Sort lines. Filtered items are displayed on the Filter line. You can move, size, dock, and hide the Filter line. Filter indicators on the Filter line and next to the item in the topic. Filter line expressions available in the Query section Filter line:
() Encloses suboperations. Var Indicates a variable. AND Retrieves data that meets both condition. OR Retrieves data that satisfies either of two conditions.
() Encloses suboperations. Var Indicates a variable. AND Retrieves data that meets both condition. OR Retrieves data that satisfies either of two conditions.
The Filter line is an interface for building compound filter, which are multiple filters linked together to form complex filter equations. See Setting Compound Filters. The Filter line enables you to convert a filter to a variable filter, which prompts the user of the document to select filters as the query is processed. See Setting Variable Filters. When placing a filter on a request item computed with a data function, a divider is displayed on the Filter line, and the Filter icon is placed to the right of the divider. The divider indicates that the filter is applied in the SQL Having clause. Subqueries and correlated subqueries use the result from an inner query as the value of a filter in an outer query.
About Filters
269
By default, all equations are solved from left to right, with enclosed sub-operations evaluated first. AND is evaluated before OR. The AND operator retrieves data that meets both conditions. For example, if you query customers, and filter State to Florida AND Item Type to Modem, the data retrieved would apply only to customers buying modems in Florida, not to modems bought in Minnesota or keyboards bought in Florida. The OR operator retrieves data that satisfies either of two conditions. For example, if you filter State to Florida OR Item Type to Modem, the data retrieved would include Florida customers and any customers purchasing modems. It would not include customers purchasing keyboards (unless they lived in Florida), or customers in Minnesota (unless they bought modems). Suboperations allow you to override the default evaluation order, and may be required for certain operations involving both AND and OR operators.
Filter Controls
When applying a filter, you supply (or select) data values associated with a data item and use mathematical logic to apply the values as constraints.
The Custom SQL feature is displayed only if you access Filter from the Query section.
This feature is displayed as Advanced in the Query section and Options in all other sections.
Create Subquery is displayed only if you access Filter from the Query section.
Name Descriptive name for the filter. Include Nulls Toggles the inclusion/exclusion of null values. Not Reverses the effect of an operator (for example, Not >= is equivalent to <). Using Operators Comparison operators for the filter expression. Values that pass the comparison test will be included.
270
Using Filters
Edit field Enter a value (or multiple values separated by commas), and click the check mark to add them to the custom values list to complete the filter definition.Click the "x" to erase the contents of the Edit field. Note: The Edit field is displayed only if you are entering a custom value. Show Values Shows all potential values from the database that are associated with the item. Note: Show values cannot be used in the Query section for filters on computed or aggregate computed metatopic items. Custom Values Lists potential values saved with the filter or read from a file. This feature enables you to select values from a predefined pool. You can create and save a custom list with each filter. Custom SQL Displays custom SQL for coding Filters directly in SQL. Note: The Custom SQL button is displayed only if you access Filter from the Query section. Select All Selects all values displayed in the list of values. Transfer Adds selected values to the custom list. Ignore Temporarily suspends a filter without deleting it. Fractional Digits Specify the number of digits that you want to place to the right of the decimal point in an SQL numeric literal statement. The SQL statement uses this setting to determine which values to recognize. For example, if you type the filter value, 0.12345678, the SQL statement writes where column = 0.12346 (the rounded value), but if you change the spinner to 8, then the SQL writes where column = 0.12345678. Advanced Displays Loaded Values settings and subquery options. Loaded Values Settings Toggles a custom values list to be read from a file or from the database. Change File allows you to specify the file name.If you read values from a text file, vertical tabs or paragraph markers must defilter each value. Use Show Values to display the file contents. Create Subquery Creates a subquery. Note: If you access Filter from the Results section, the Advanced button is displayed as Options and the Create Subquery option is not displayed.
Showing Values
The Show Values command is a powerful option for selecting values to define filters. Show Values provides a list of values actually in the database (or in the data set in Results) and allows you to choose a value based on the data available. This feature makes it possible to set filters accurately without being familiar with the contents of the database. Show Values is also advantageous when values change frequently and custom lists quickly become outdated.
About Filters
271
when the data item is large, consists mostly of values, or does not change frequently (for example, telephone numbers). In these situations, custom lists are sufficient and help avoid extra calls to the database. You administrator may disable Show Values if database hits are a concern.
Note: Show Values cannot be used for filtering computed or aggregate items.
Click Show Values in Filter to retrieve the items values from the database, then select the values to be included in the custom list and click Transfer. Click Custom Values and enter values individually in the edit field, then click the check mark to add each to the custom list. Click Advanced and select Load From File to read values from a separate file. Use the Change File button to choose a file from the Select Filter File window. Click Show Values to load the values from the file to the list of values. Click Transfer to add selected values to the custom list.
Values added to the custom list can be selected to determine the filter. If the filter is converted to a variable filter, the custom list is stored in the document and the saved values are available to users who resolve the filter.
272
Using Filters
Using Operators
Logical operators for defining filters support standard SQL wildcards, including % and _.
Table 48
Logical Operators for Defining Filters Description Retrieves records where the filtered item equals the specified value(s). Retrieves records where the filtered item does not equal the specified value(s). Retrieves records where the filtered item is less than the specified value(s). Retrieves records where the filtered item is no greater than the specified value(s) Retrieves records where the filtered item is greater than the specified value(s). Retrieves records where the filtered item is no less than the specified value(s) Retrieves records where the filtered item begins with the specified value(s) up to and including the end value. Retrieves records where the filtered item contains the specified value(s) regardless of location. Retrieves records where the filtered item ends with the specified value(s). Retrieves records where a text string is displayed and reflects the placement of the specified value(s). For example, Name Likes_ would retrieve records for all employees whose names have the letters Ze followed by one character at the end
Operator Equal (=) Not Equal (<>) Less Than (<) Less or Equal (<=) Greater Than (>); Greater or Equal (>=); Begins With Contains Ends With Like (with wildcards)
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example a field in which no data has been entered. Retrieves records where the value of the filtered item lies between (and does not equal) the specified values. Negates the operator it precedes, reversing the results of the equation
Note: Text strings are evaluated differently among database systems, and are often case-sensitive (that is, RED, Red and red may not be equivalent in comparison). Text characters are generally valued in ascending order (0 1... 9 A B C... Z a b c... Z.), so that A is less than a in string comparisons, and strings beginning with numbers are considered less than strings beginning with alphabetic characters. See your administrator for specific information.
273
Note: In the Interactive Reporting Web Client, you can only add filters in the Query section if you have the Data Model, Query, and Analyze adaptive state.
Filtering Queries
The simplest way to filter a query is to apply filters individually to topic items.
To filter a query:
1 Select an item in the data model and choose Query > Add Filter(s).
Filter is displayed.
2 Select an arithmetic or logical operator from the list. 3 Define the potential filter values by clicking one of the following options:
Show Value Shows database values associated with the item. Custom Values Supplies an empty field for inputting custom values. Click the check mark to add a value to the list of values. You can also display values from a previously saved custom list or values loaded from a file. Custom SQL Supplies an empty box for typing an SQL clause to be included in the query statement. Choose View > Custom SQL to check the complete statement logic.
4 Select the values to include in the filter definition in the Values list.
Individually select values or click Select all and deselect the values you do not want to include. Only selected items are applied to the filter definition. To create a snapshot of the values, click Select All and then click Transfer to move the variables to the Custom Values.
5 When the correct values are highlighted in the Values list, click OK.
The filter is applied to the topic item and an icon is added to the Filter line. In the Query section, the filter is applied when you process the Query.
Note: When placing a filter on an aggregate item (computed with a data function) in the Query section, a filter divider is displayed and the filter icon is placed to the right. The divider indicates the filter is in the SQL Having clause. You must drag the aggregate item from the Request line to the Filter line to create a filter on an aggregate item.
274
Using Filters
Filtering Results
To filter the display of data in the Results section:
1 Select a column (click the column heading) and choose Results > Filter. 2 Filter is displayed.
3 Select an arithmetic or logical operator from the list. 4 Define the potential filter values by clicking one of the following options:
Show Values Shows database values associated with the item. Custom Values Supplies an empty field for inputting custom values. Click the check mark to add them to the list of values. You can also display values from a previously saved custom list or values loaded from a file.
5 Select the values to include in the filter definition in the Values list.
Individually select values or click Select all and deselect the values you dont want to include. Only selected items are applied to the filter definition.
6 When the correct values are highlighted in the Values list, click OK.
An indicator is added to the Filter line and the filter is immediately applied to the data set.
275
2 In the Query section only, click the small arrow at the left edge of the Filter line.
The Filter line is adjusted to display the Filter line control buttons.
To switch Boolean operators AND and OR, double-click the operator you want to change. To enclose suboperations, select the items you want to enclose and click the parentheses button. To remove parentheses, select a parenthesis and click Remove on the shortcut menu. With an item selected on the Filter line, click Var to make the filter variable.
When using compound filters, verify that the expression delivers the correct results.
Tip: The following syntax rules apply to all Filter line expressions. When creating a compound filter,
be sure to verify that the expression is delivering the correct results. The AND operator retrieves data that meets both conditions. If you want to retrieve data which satisfies either of two conditions, use the OR operator. By default, equations are solved from left to right, with enclosed sub-operations evaluated first. AND is evaluated before OR. Sub-operations allow you to override the default evaluation order, and may be required for certain operations involving both AND and OR operators.
276
Using Filters
2 Select a topic item on the Filter line. 3 Choose Query > Variable Filter.
The Filter item is displayed with a V(1) beside the item name to indicate it is a variable filter. If other items are set to variable filters, they are displayed with V(2), V(3), and so on, to indicate the order in which the user is prompted to respond to Variable Filter when the query is processed.
277
Title Add a title or text to the filter dialog to instruct users on how to set the filter or on what the values mean. Prompt Supply explanatory comments or instructions. Values Disable Show Values to reduce database hits or remove the Custom SQL or Custom Values option. Options Disable elements and lock in operators.
3 Click OK.
2 Select a logical operator from the shortcut list. 3 Complete a filter definition by supplying constraining values.
Create a Customs Values list by supplying a value (or values, separated by commas) in the Edit field, and clicking the check mark. You can also click Show Values to display column values and select one or more values depending on the comparison operator.
4 When the values are highlighted in the values pane, click OK.
The filter is applied to the column and the column name is added to the Filter line.
278
Using Filters
To remove a filter in a Table report, select the filter item that you want to remove, and select
Remove on the shortcut menu.
To remove all filters in a Table report, select Filter on the Filter line and then select Remove on
the shortcut men.
279
Since the fixed filter is applied to the original date item, the meta topic date item incorporates this filter transparently. The values excluded by the fixed filter are not associated within the new meta topic, and are not returned by the Show Values feature for fixed or variable filters applied to the new meta topic item. Note also that Filter Browse Level settings need not be modified under this scenario because the filters in question are applied to different logical layers.
3 If the Filter line is not already displayed, click the Filter button on the Section Titlebar. 4 Drag the computed item from the Request line and drop it in the Filter line.
Filter is displayed.
5 Optional: Enter a descriptive name for the filter in the Name field.
The name is displayed on the filter line icon and can help differentiate multiple filters set on the same item. The name is also used when scheduling a document.
6 Select an arithmetic or logical operator from the list to begin defining a filter expression. 7 Define a pool of potential filter values by entering a filter value in the edit field and clicking the check-mark
to add each to the values list pane.
You cannot use the Show Values command since Interactive Reporting Studio cannot retrieve a values list for a computed or aggregated request item from the database. Click Custom Values to supply the values in the edit field and click the check-mark to add them to the values pane. You can also display values from a custom list previously saved with the document or loaded from a file. If you are familiar with SQL, click Custom SQL and type an SQL Where clause to be included in the query statement. You can open the Custom SQL dialog to check the complete statement logic.
8 Select the values to include in the filter definition in the values pane.
280
Using Filters
Select values individually or click Select all and then deselect those you do not want to include. Only selected items are applied to the filter definition.
9 When the correct values for the filter expression are highlighted in the values pane, click OK.
An indicator is added to the Filter line. In the Results section, the filter is applied to the data set immediately. In the Query section, the filter is applied when you process the Query. When placing a filter on a Request item computed with a data function in the Query section, a divider is displayed on the Filter line, and the filter icon is placed to the right of the divider. The divider indicates the filter is applied in the SQL Having clause.
Filter
Use Filter to apply filters, which refine your data set by excluding unneeded data. When applying a filter, you supply (or select from a list) data values associated with a data item, and use mathematical logic to apply the values as constraints.
Tip: All filters are applied through Filter. Filters apply only to the chosen data item. You can
combine filters into more complex Compound Filters using the Filter Line.
Note: Filters apply only to the chosen data item. You can combine filters into more complex Compound Filters using the Filter line.
Customize Filter
Use Customize Filter to control access to filter features. This can be especially useful when you distribute documents to end users. For example, if a document is to be distributed to novice users who must set a simple variable filter, it may be preferable to disable or even remove such features as Include Null or the Custom Values buttons.
Table 49
Customize Filter Description Add a title or text to the Filter to instruct users on setting the filter, or describe the value. Supply explanatory comments or instructions. Disable the Show Values option ro reduce database hits, or remove the Custom SQL or Custom Values options. Disable elemtns and lock in operators.
Option
281
282
Using Filters
Chapter
12
This chapter describes how to use calculations to compute new data items in the Query, Results, and reporting sections. Such calculations are important for supplementing the information already stored in the database.
In This Chapter About Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Adding Computed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Using Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Common Computed Item Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Scalar Function Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Trend Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
283
Build arithmetic expressions {Units * Amount = Revenue} Build logical expressions {If Score > =50 Then Pass Else Fail} Build mixed expressions {Tax = Revenue *.35) Apply functions {(abs (Amount_Sold)}
A Full_Name item that concatenates the values in the First_Name and Last_Name items. A Profit item derived by subtracting the Cost of Goods column from the Gross Revenues column. A Grade item that uses ifelse logic to assign letter grades derived from test scores. A Sine item that computes an item for the sine of an angle. A Moving Average item that smooths a set of data points, i.e., removes irregular fluctuations in the general trend of data.
284
In all Interactive Reporting sections, you can use computed items to create a completely new data item on the Request line from an already existing data item. Each value in the original data item is computed to produce a new value in the newly generated data item. A one-to-one correspondence exists between the original values and the derived computed values.
Data Types and Specifications Specification A data type is determined automatically given the data type of the reference items and the computations performed. Variable data type of length determined by a single byte of computer storage. Bytes can store numeric values from 0 to 255, or a single text character. Calendar date in server default format (typically mm/dd/yy). Retains a 16-bit value (2 bytes). A 16-bit integer stores integer values from 0 to 16,777,216, and signed integers between +8,388,608 and 8,388,608. Retains a 32-bit value (4 bytes). A 32-bit integer has a range of 0 to 4,294,967,296 if unsigned. If signed, -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647. Real numbers packed for use with EDA middleware. The results in Interactive Reporting Studio are the same as real numbers. Decimal numbers up to 5 positions right of the decimal. Text strings to a maximum length of 256 characters. Time in format set by user preference. Date/time combination in format set by user preference.
Data type Automatic Byte Date Integer (16-bit) Integer (32-bit) Packed Real Real String Time TimeStamp
285
In the Results and Table sections, reference items are filtered to the items that are displayed on the Request line. In the remaining reporting sections (excluding the Report Designer section), reference items are limited to the items placed in the Fact pane in the Data Layout. Computations in these sections work on the aggregated cell values that make up the core of the report. To perform computations on data before it is aggregated, compute the new item in Results. In the Report section, the break totals of a table can be calculated
286
If you are calculating totals and break totals for a BQY created in Release 8.3.2 and early (legacy computed items) you can still calculate totals based on the columns data function applied to surface values, or the underlying formula of the column. For legacy computed item columns, the True Total Computation is changed to Legacy Total Computation. If the user selects Legacy Total Computation from the speed menu (essentially trying to turn it off), the user will get an alert dialog indicating that the change cannot be undone (This action cannot be undone. Are you sure you want to use True Total Computations for Total and Break Totals? Continue/Cancel). If the user chooses Continue, then True Totals will be enabled for both Totals and Break Totals of this column. The next time they display the context menu it will show True Total Computation option in place of Legacy Total Computation. The user may no longer apply the legacy behavior to this column.
Break total cell results derived from the computed item formula applied to the detail cell True Computed Item totals
When determining which method to use, look at how the two types of totals differ from each other. The former method is derived from the formula used to calculate the detail cell. True computed item totals use aggegation according to the specified data function and they never rely on the computed item total formula. Depending on what you are trying to achieve, each method will show different totals You can see how the two types of totaling computed items differ in the example below. The first part of the example shows what happens when the totals are derived from the computed item formula used in the detail cells.
287
Detail cell data is shown at the City level and break totals are shown when the State changes.
Detail cells
In this example, the Sum data function has been applied. The Computed column is defined by the following formula:
(Units % 50) +1
where % represents modulo (remainder) operator. In other words, the formula is defined as:
Integer remainder of (Unit column cell value /50) + 1
For the Unit column values for each city within a state, the formula works as expected. For example, in the Oakland, CA cell, the formula is:
Units 910 Modulo (remainder) of 910 / 50 = 10 Add 1 to assign a value of 11 (shown above).
For the California Total row, the value shown is 41, which is the result of the following formula:
Total Units for California = 12390 Modulo of 123900/50 = 40 Add 1 to assign a value of 41
The Modulo of 41 is not the sum of the displayed cell values for all cities in California, instead it is the modulo formula applied only to the cell containing the Unit column city total for California. If you expected to see a break cell total value of 145, you need to use the True Computed Item feature total, which would reference the displayed values in the detail cells (this example assumes a Sum data function):
46 +1 + 11 +1 +46 ( = 145
288
Computed items calculate a fresh value for each original value, based on the computation (for example, Revenue calculated from Price and Units Sold). The new values are part of a new data item or replace the original values. Computed items never reduce the original number of records. Data functions, by contrast, summarize groups of database records and replace the original values with new summary data. Because data functions summarize values, the number of records are frequently reduced.
Pivot Options
The Pivot Options tab allows you to enable and disable surface values, how to handle true computed item totals, and how to treat null fact values. For more information, see Selecting Pivot Table Elements on page 174.
289
3 Define the new data item by building an expression in the Definition text box.
Use the operator buttons to insert arithmetic and logical operators at the insertion point. Click Functions to apply scalar functions using the Functions dialog box. Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select items to place in the equation.
You also can type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace spaces in item names with underscores (_).
4 If necessary, click the Options button to set a new data type for the item. 5 When the equation is complete, click OK.
The computed item is listed in the Results Data Layout and is displayed as a column in the results set. In the Query section, the computed item is displayed on the Request line with its new name. In the Results section, computed items are displayed in the Data Layout in blue type.
290
Operators
The following sections describe the operators available for creating computed items. Use the following guidelines as you add operators to your computation.
Type the word null (no quotes) into the Expression text box to represent null values. Enclose all text string constant values and date constant values entered in expressions in single quotes. (Numbers can be entered without quotes.) To join items with a space or other character, reference or type items and strings into the Expression text box and join them with the + operator (for example, City + , + State). To join without additional characters, use the Concat function. In division operations, the divisor may not be null or equal to zero. If a data item serves as the divisor in an expression (for example, 5000 / Units_Sold) and includes null or zero values, first create a computed item using if/else logic to remove null and zero values, and then compute the item containing the division operation. Two date items can be subtracted, but not added. The Add Month function adds an integer value to a date. You cannot nest functions inside the Sum, Cume, Chr, and Breaksum functions.
Arithmetic Operators
Arithmetic operators take numerical values (either logical or variables) as their operands and return a single numerical value.
Table 51
Arithmetic Operators Name Add Subtract Multiply Divide Begin suboperations End suboperations Increment Description Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections except the Query section.
Operator + * / ( ) ++
291
Table 51
Arithmetic Operators Decrement Modulus The modulus operator returns the remainder of dividing var1 by var2. For example, 5% 4 returns 1. Used at both the server level and the local metatopic level for all sections except the Query section. Used only at the local metatopic level.
-Mod (%)
Comparison Operators
A comparison operator compares its operands and returns a logical value based on whether the comparison is true. The operands can be numerical or string values. When used on string values, the comparisons are based on the standard lexicographical ordering. The comparison operators in Table 52 are only available at the local metatopic level.
Table 52
Comparison Operators (Local Metatopic Level) Description Returns true if the operands are equal. Returns true if the operands are not equal. Returns true if the left operand is less than the right operand. Returns true if the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand. Returns true if the left operand is greater than the right operand. Returns true if the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
Statements
Executes a set of statements if a specified condition is true. If the condition is false, another set of statements can be executed.
Note: Statements are only available at the local metatopic level.
292
Table 53
if...else Statement Description if executes a set of statements if a specified condition is true. The specified condition may be another statement and can include other nested if statements. Braces, {}, must enclose multiple statements. If the condition is false, another set of statements can be executed if the optional else statement has been included in the script. A sample if else statement looks likes this:
Statement ifelse
Logical Operators
Logical operators take Boolean (logical) values as operands and return a Boolean value. The logical operators in Table 54 are only available at the local metatopic level.
Table 54
Logical Operators (Local Metatopic Level) Description Connects two conditional expressions and retrieves records only if each expression is true. Specifies a combination of expressions and retrieves records that include at least one of the expressions. For example, if one of the words is Washington or Oregon, every record with the expression Washington and every record with the word Oregon is included. Computes and shows items more accurately stated in a negative way. In effect, all records are retrieved except those that fulfill the conditional expression. You enter the conditional expression with the NOT (!) logical operator preceding the conditional expression.The conditional expression can be a simple value or nested within other conditional expressions, for example, expressions using AND and OR. A combined condition expression that uses NOT is true if the conditional expression following NOT is false. A combined conditional expression is false if the conditional expression following NOT is true.
NOT (!)
Using Functions
This section lists the functions available in Interactive Reporting Studio, including:
Scalar Functions Teradata Version 3 OLAP Functions Functions for Returning the Day of the Week
Using Functions
293
Scalar Functions
Tables 55 through 60 list the available scalar functions.
Note: In the tables for Conditional, Date, Math, String and Trend functions below, the variables n, s, d, and exp (and val) represent data items and columns (State, Amount Sold) or actual values (NY, 6000) as arguments to scalar functions, and indicate number, string, date, or variable types, respectively.
Note: The variable c indicates that only a data item reference may be used, and not a constant value. If constant values are substituted for data items, dates and text strings must be enclosed in single quotes. Examples in the tables that follow use a mixture of constants and data items, which are generally interchangeable.
Table 55
Conditional Scalar Functions Description Compares value of item c to one or more expressions exp, and returns the value val matched to each expression, or a default def. Returns exp2 if null, and exp1 otherwise.
Table 56
Date Scalar Functions Description Adds n months to date d. Returns the day of month for date d. Returns date of the last day of the month containing date d. Returns the number of months between dates d1 and d2 as a real number (fractional value). Returns the date of the first weekday s after date d. If s is omitted, add one day to d. Returns the current system date and time for each record in item c. Converts the date or number d/n into a string in the specified format. This function does not change the data, but rather the item data type. The results cannot be computed mathematically. If you are referencing a Date or Number column for the first argument (Date field), single quotes are not required. If you are passing a data value, single quotes are required. A comma must immediately follow the first argument. In the second argument (Format field), single quotes or double quotes must enclose values.
Function AddMonths (d,n) DayOfMonth (d) LastDay (d) MonthsBetween (d1,d2) NextDay (d,s) Sysdate (c) ToCha (d/n, 'f' or "f")
Returns date type in place of date-string s. This function does not change the data, but rather the item data type. The results can be computed mathematically. Returns a numeric month value for each value of d. You can change the value to display as a month string by adding and applying a mmm date format.
294
Table 56
Date Scalar Functions (Continued) Returns a string quarter value for each value of d. Returns the integer year for each value of d. You can convert the year to display without commas by applying the 0 numeric format.
Table 57
Math Scalar Functions Description Returns the absolute value of number n. Returns arc tangent of number n radians. Returns the smallest integer value greater than or equal to number n. Returns cosine of number n radians. Returns hyperbolic cosine of number n radians. Returns the number of row values in c (including nulls). Returns e (2.718) raised to exponential power n. Returns the larger of items a and b for each new value. Returns the smaller of items a and b for each new value. Returns the integer remainder of number n divided by number m. If m is larger, the default value is n. Returns number n raised to exponential power m. Returns number n rounded to m decimal places. The default value for m is 0. Returns indicator of -1, 0, or 1 if number n is variously negative, 0, or positive. Returns sine of number n radians. Returns hyperbolic sine of number n radians. Returns square root of number n. Returns tangent of number n radians. Returns hyperbolic tangent of number n radians. Returns number n truncated to number m decimal places. The default value for m is 0.
Function Abs (n) Atn (n) Ceil (n) Cos (n) Cosh (n) Count (c) Exp (n) Max (a,b) Min (a,b) Mod (n,m) Power (n,m) Round (n,m) Sign (n) Sin (n) Sinh (n) Sqrt (n) Tan (n) Tanh (n) Trunc (n,m)
Using Functions
295
Table 58
Numeric Scalar Functions Description Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of values in a number column. The average includes null values when calculating the arithmetic mean. Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of values in a number column, excluding null values. Returns string converted from ASCII numeric code n. Returns the largest value in a column of numbers. Returns the smallest value in a column of number. Counts and returns the number of rows in a column. Counts and returns the number of values in a column. Counts the number of rows in a column. Counts the number of rows in a column that contains null values. Returns a cumulative running total for each value in a column of numbers. Returns the next row value of the referenced item c. Returns the prior row value of the referenced item c. Returns the total of a column of numbers.
AvgNonNull (numbers, break_col, break_value) chr (n) ColMax (numbers, break_col, break_value) ColMin (numbers, break_col, break_value) Count (numbers, break_col, break_value) CountDistinct (numbers, break_col, break_value) CountNonNull (numbers, break_col, break_value) CountNull (numbers, break_col, break_value) Cume (numbers, break_col) Next (c) Prior (c) Sum (numbers, break_col, break_value)
Table 59
Statistical Scalar Functions Description Returns the median of a column of numbers. Returns the most frequently occurring value in a column of numbers. Returns the nth percentile of values in a column of numbers in ascending order. Returns the rank of a number in a column of numbers. example There is a restriction on setting a filter on an aggregate column (which Rank is considered). To set a filter on the column, insert a new table into the document and drag the columns into the table Data Layout. This creates a copy of the columns which can have a filter set on it.
Function Median (numbers, break) Mode (numbers, break_col) Percentile (numbers, n, break_col)
296
Table 59
Statistical Scalar Functions (Continued) Estimates standard deviation based on a sample. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean). If your data represents the entire population, then compute the standard deviation using the function. Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population given as arguments. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean). If your data represents a sample of the population, then compute the standard deviation using the function. Estimates variance based on a sample. The Var function assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, then compute the variance using the Varp function. Estimates variance based on the entire population. The Varp function assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, then compute the variance using the function.
Table 60
String Scalar Functions Description Returns an ASCII numeric representation of string s. Returns text strings s1 and s2 concatenated. Returns string s with the first letter of each word capitalized, and remaining characters in lower case. Returns position of mth occurrence of string s2 in string s1, beginning at position number n. If n is negative, the count is made backwards from the end of s1. If no values are found, 0 is returned. Returns character count of string s. Returns string s in lower case. Trims string s1 from the left, up to the first character not included in string s2. Returns string item s1 with all occurrences of string s2 replaced by string s3. The default for s3 deletes each occurrence of s2. Trims column string s1 from the right, up to the first character not included in string s2. Returns a portion of string s, m characters long, beginning at numeric position n. The default action for m includes all remaining characters. Returns string s1, with each character contained in string s2 replaced by the corresponding characters in string s3. Returns string s in upper case.
Function Ascii (s) Concat (s1, s2) Initcap (s) Instr (s1,s2,n,m)
Length (s) Lower (s) Ltrim (s1,s2) Replace (s1,s2,s3) Rtrim (s1,s2) Substr (s,n,m) Translate (s1,s2,s3) Upper (s)
Using Functions
297
CSum (Cumulative Sum) Function Description Accumulates a sum over an ordered set of rows, providing the current values of the SUM on each row CSum(value_expression, sort_expression_list) A value_expression is a scalar numeric column expression for which a running sum is to be computed. The sort_expression_list is a list of expressions (with optional sort direction specifications) separated by commas. That is, it specifies the column references used to sort the values. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC).
Table 62
MAvg (Moving Average) Function Description Computes the moving average of a column using the current row and the preceding width-1 rows. MAvg(value_expression, width, sort_expression_list) The value expression represents a scalar numeric column expression for which a moving average is to be computed. The expression cannot contain any OLAP or aggregate functions.
width
The width represents the number of previous rows to be used in computing the moving average. The width value is always a positive integer constant. The maximum width is 4096. The sort_expression_list is a list of expressions (with optional sort direction specifications) separated by commas. That is, it specifies the column references used to sort the values. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC).
sort_expression_list
298
Table 63
MDiff (Moving Difference) Function Description Returns the moving difference between the current row-column value and the preceding nth value. The moving difference is a common business metric used to compare activity for some variable in a current time period to the activity for the same variable in another time period at a fixed distance in the past.
Field Description
Syntax: value_expression
MDiff(value_expression, width, sort_expression_list) The value expression represents a scalar numeric column expression for which a moving average is to be computed. The expression cannot contain any OLAP or aggregate functions. The width represents the number of previous rows to be used in computing the moving average. The width value is always a positive integer constant. The maximum width is 4096. The sort_expression_list is a list of expressions (with optional sort direction specifications) separated by commas. That is, it specifies the column references used to sort the values. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC).
width
sort_expression_list
Table 64
MSum (Moving Sum) Function Description Computes the moving sum of a column using the current row and the preceding n-1 row. MSum(value_expression, width, sort_expression_list) The value expression represents a scalar numeric column expression for which a moving average is to be computed. The expression cannot contain any OLAP or aggregate functions. The width represents the number of previous rows to be used in computing the moving average. The width value is always a positive integer constant. The maximum width is 4096. The sort_expression_list is a list of expressions (with optional sort direction specifications) separated by commas. That is, it specifies the column references used to sort the values. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC).
width
sort_expression_list
Using Functions
299
Table 65
MLingreg (Multiple Linear Regression) Function Description Returns a predicted value for a column expression based on a least squares multiple linear regression of the previous width-1 based on the sort_expression column values. When there are fewer than width-1 preceding rows, the MLinreg function computes the regression using all the preceding rows. MLingreg(value_expression, width, sort_expression_list) The value expression represents a scalar numeric column expression for which a moving average is to be computed. The expression cannot contain any OLAP or aggregate functions. The width represents the number of previous rows to be used in computing the moving average. The width-1 previous rows are used to compute the linear regression and the row value itself is used to calculate the predicted value. The width value is always a positive integer constant greater than 1. The maximum width is 4096. The sort_expression_list is a column reference used to sort the values and to define the dependent variable for calculating the linear regression. The sort_expression_list is an expression with optional sort direction specification. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC). Only one sort_expression is allowed with this function.
Field Description
Syntax: value_expression
width
sort_expression_list
Table 66
Quantile Function Description Computes the quantile scores for the values in a column. A quantile is a generic interval of user-defined width. Quantile(quantile_constant, sort_expression_list) A positive integer constant used to define the number of quantile partitions to be used. List of expressions (with optional sort direction specifications) separated by commas. That is, it specifies the column references used to sort the values. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC). 0 through (Q-1) where Q is the number of quantile partitions specified by the quantile constant.
Table 67
Rank Function Description Returns the rank (1n) of all the rows in the group by the value of sort_expression_list, with the same sort_expression values receiving the same rank.
Field Description
300
Table 67
Rank Function (Continued) Rank(sort_expression_list) List of expressions (with optional sort direction specifications) separated by commas. That is, it specifies the column references used to sort the values. The default sort direction is ascending (ASC).
Syntax: sort_expression_list
Table 68
Current Timestamp Function Description Returns the current system timestamp and current session Time Zone displacement. Current_Timestamp(fractional_precision) An option precision range for the returned timestamp value. The value range is 0 through 6, inclusive. The default is 6. Data type: TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE Length: 12 Not nullable YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND, TIMEZONE_HOUR, TIMEZONE_MINUTE
Fields
Table 69
Qualify Function Description Filters results of a previously computed OLAP function according to user-specified conditions. Qualify search_condition Represents a conditional clause in the SELECT statement. One or more conditional expressions that must be satisfied by the result rows. Aggregate operators with a Qualify clause can be used. When you specify a QUALIFY clause in a query, you must also specify a statistical function in one of the following locations within the query. select_list of the SELECT clause grouping_key of the GROUP BY clause search_condition of the QUALIFY clause When the WHERE, GROUP BY, and QUALIFY clauses are used together in a SELECT statement, the order of evaluation is: WHERE GROUP BY QUALIFY
Field Description
Using Functions
301
Table 70
Sample Function Description Reduces the number of rows to be considered for further processing by returning mutually exclusive samples of rows specified either as a list of fractions of the total number of rows or as a list of numbers of rows from the SELECT query. Sample(fractional_description [count_description]) Represents any number of floating point constants in the closed interval (0, 1) and separated by a comma. This is a list of fractions, the sum of which must not exceed 1. Represents a positive integer constant list of row counts. A warning is returned if there are not enough rows in the result to satisfy the sampling request completely. No more than 16 samples can be requested per SELECT statement. SAMPLE operates on the evaluated output of the table expression, which can include a WHERE clause and GROUP BY, HAVING, or QUALIFY clauses, sampling the result according to use specification. A sampling request cannot be repeated. The identical sampling query run twice against the same data will report different rows in the result. Sampling can be used in a derived table, view, or INSERT-SELECT to reduce the number of rows to be considered for further computation. You cannot use SAMPLE in a subquery. If a fraction_description results in no rows being returned, a warning is generated. If a count_description cannot be completely satisfied, a warning is generated and the sample size is reduced to the number of remaining rows.
Field Description
Table 71
SampleID Function Description Identifies the sample to which a row belongs, distinguishing rows belonging to different samples specified in the SAMPLE clause of a SELECT statement. SAMPLEID The sample ID identifies the sample to which a row belongs in the left-to-right order of the SAMPLE clause specification, from 1 through n (where n is the number of samples requested in the SAMPLE clause). SAMPLEID can only be specified with a SAMPLE clause and can be displayed either as part of a SELECT clause or in an ORDER BY clause.
Field Description
Syntax: Definition
302
2 Select Custom from the Category list. 3 In the Format field, type ddd to display a three-letter day abbreviation or dddd to display the full name, and
click OK.
Using Functions
303
Math Functions
A mathematical equation consists of the argument and a simple or complex arithmetic operator that is applied to the argument. In this example, the sales tax is calculated as a percentage of the revenue (3.5%). The Net Amount column is calculated by subtracting the tax dollars from the revenue.
Central Tendency
If you need to distinguish patterns within a given set of data, you can begin looking for the center of distribution where statistics tend to reside. This form of measurement involves finding the average in the data set and is typically referred to as the Measure of Central Tendency technique. Three types of measurements are associated with this technique:
Mean The value is equal to the sum of the measures divided by the number of measures. Median The value is representative of the positional middle measure. Mode The value that occurs with the greatest frequency.
In this example, Unit Sales represent the total number of product units purchased. Mean of Unit Sales represents the average purchase size. Median of Unit Sales represent the number of product units that scores exactly in the middle of all purchase quantities. The Mode of Unit Sales presents the number of product units most commonly purchased at one time.
304
=Avg(Unit_Sales,Year)
=Median(Unit_Sales,Year)
=Mode(Unit_Sales,Year)
Calculated Averages
Calculated averages can be applied to break columns and break values. In this example, a variety of columns are created and display different average calculations based on the Amount_Sales column.
The following table shows how averages have been calculated in the figure above.
Table 72
Calculated Averages Numeric Function sum of Amount Sales by quarter and Product Line
= Sum (Amount_Sales)
Entire Year
average purchase amount (Amount Sales) across all quarters and Product Lines
= Avg (Amount_Sales)
By Quarter
average purchase amount (Amount Sales) in a specific quarter for a Product line
= Avg data function applied to Amount_Sales column
average purchase size (Amount Sales) across all Product Lines for Q1 specifically
= Avg (Amount_Sales, Quarter, 'Q1')
For Books
average purchase size (Amount Sales) across all Quarters for Books
= Avg (Amount_Sales, Product_Line, 'Books')
305
Percentile
Suppose Sales Managers qualify for a special bonus if they are within the 80th percentile (Qualify column). You can define an 80th percentile value for Amount Sales.
The Eightieth Percentile column calculates the 80th percentile value for all Sales managers: =Percentile (Amount Sales, .8) Important! Surface values must be used in this type of export.
The Qualify column determines whether a Sales Manager is within the 80th percentile: =if (Amount_Sales >= Eightieth_Percentile) {a}
The second example identifies countries that make sales transactions under $10,000.
Calculated by finding the 95th percentile value within each country. Country is used as the break column. =Percentile (Amount Sales, .95, Country) Important! Calculations must be done using the underlying values instead of the surface values.
Percentile values under $10,000.00 are spotlighted in red to identify the countries that have such sales transactions 95% of the time.
Rank
You can return the rank of a number in a column of numbers. The Rank function works as if you were to sort the list in descending order. In this example, Amount Sales values are ranked for each Country.
Note: The Rank function assigns duplicate numbers the same rank, which affects the ranks of subsequent numbers.
306
Countries ranked by their Amount sales. Country is the break column. =Rank (Amount Sales, Country)
Project Sales
This example shows a calculation for a 20% increase in sales projections for each quarter, based on Amount Sales for 1999.
307
Count CountDistinct CountNull CountNonNull Cume Sum Median Mode Percentile Rank RankAsc StdDev StdDevp Var Varp
Avg
The Avg function returns the average (arithmetic mean) of values in a number column.
Avg (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the average is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column. break_value is an optional parameter that returns the average of numbers column where value
In this example, the Avg function is used on the numeric column and break_column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Avg (Amount, State)
308
Table 73
Avg Example 2 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 112 168.5 168.5 70 97 208 159 335 335
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
AvgNonNull
The AvgNonNull function returns the average (arithmetic mean) of values in a number column, excluding null values.
Avg (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the average is calculated. break_col
break_value is an optional parameter that returns the average of non-null numbers column
In this example, the AvgNonNull function is used on the numeric column, break_column, and break_value. The results are shown in the Computed column
AvgNonNull (Amount, State, CA)
Table 74
AvgNonNull Example 3 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Amount 112 240 NULL 70 Computed 240 240 240 240
State AZ CA CA FL
309
State MD MI MN NY NY
ColMax
The ColMax function returns the largest value in a column of numbers.
ColMax (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the number on which the maximum column
value is calculated.
break_col
break_value is an optional parameter that returns the maximum value of numbers column
In this example, the ColMax function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
ColMax(Amount)
Table 75
ColMax Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan Amount 112 240 NULL 70 97 208 159 Computed 490 490 490 490 490 490 490
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN
310
State NY NY
ColMin
The ColMin function returns the smallest value in a column of numbers.
ColMin (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the count of minimum
In this example, the ColMin function is used on the numeric column and break_column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
ColMin (Amount, State)
Table 76
ColMin Example 2 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 Null 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 112 240 240 70 97 208 159 180 180
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
311
Count
The Count function counts the number of rows in a column.
Count (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the count is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column. break_value is an optional parameter that returns the count of numbers column where value
In this example, the Count function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Count (Amount)
Table 77
Count Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
CountDistinct
The CountDistinct function counts the number of values in a column.
CountDistinct (numbers, break_col, break_values)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the count of distinct (unique) values is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column. break_value is an optional parameter that returns a distinct (unique) count of numbers column where value in break_col equals break_value.
312
Note: The CountDistinct function differentiates actual values and not the rows. The CountDistinct function counts only the actual rows in a column. For example, if column named OS Operating Systems has one hundred rows and shows data by Windows and UNIX systems, the CountDistinct function counts only the three operating systems and not the number of rows.
In this example, the CountDistinct function is used on the numeric column and break_column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
CountDistinct (Amount, State)
Table 78
CountDistinct Example 2 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 240 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
CountNull
The CountNull function counts the number of rows in a column that contains null values.
CountNull (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the count of null values is
calculated.
break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column. break_value is an optional parameter that returns the count of null numbers column where
In this example, the CountNull function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
CountNull(Amount)
313
Table 79
CountNull Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 NULL 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
CountNonNull
The CountNonNull function counts the number of rows in a column that do not contain null values.
CountNonNull (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the count of non-null
values is calculated.
break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column. break_value is an optional parameter that returns the count of non-null numbers column
In this example, the CountNonNull function is used on the numeric column, break_column, and break_value. The results are shown in the Computed column.
CountNonNull (Amount, State, CA)
Table 80
CountNonNull Example 3 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Amount 112 240 97 Computed 1 1 1
State AZ CA CA
314
State FL MD MI MN NY NY
Computed 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cume
The Cume function returns a cumulative running total for each value in a column of numbers.
Cume (numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the cume is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
Note: If constant values in the break_value column are substituted for data items, dates and text strings must be enclosed in single quotes.
In this example, the Cume function is used on the numeric column and break_column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Cume (Amount, State)
Table 81
Cume Example 2 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 112 240 337 70 97 208 159 490 670
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
315
Sum
The Sum function computes the total for a column of numbers.
Sum (numbers, break_col, break_value)
where:
numbers
references the column that contains the numbers on which the sum is calculated.
break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column. break_value is an optional parameter that returns the sum of numbers column where value in
In this example, the Sum function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Sum(Amount)
Table 82
Sum Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 NULL 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 1556 1556 1556 1556 1556 1556 1556 1556 1556
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
Median
The Median function returns the median of a column of numbers. The median is the middle value or number in the middle of a set of numbers (and not the average).
Median (numbers, break_col)
numbers
references the column that contains the numbers on which the median is calculated. is an optional parameter that references a break column.
break_col
316
In this example, the Median function is used on a numeric column that has an odd number of rows:
Median (Amount)
The Median function returns the number in the middle, which in this example is 30.
Table 83
State AZ CA FL MD MI
If the numbers column has an even number of rows, the Median function calculates the average of the two numbers in the middle.
Table 84
State AZ CA FL MD
Mode
The Mode function returns the most frequently occurring value in columns of numbers.
Mode (numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the mode is calculated. break_col
Note: Null values in the numbers column are ignored. Zeroes (0) are included. If the numbers column has no duplicate data values, the Mode function returns the value of the first cell in the numbers column.
In this example, the Mode function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Mode(Amount)
317
Table 85
State AZ CA FL MD MI
Percentile
The Percentile function returns the nth percentile of values in a column of numbers.
Percentile (numbers, n, break_col)
where:
numbers
references the column that contains the numbers on which the percentile is calculated.
Note: Percentile can also be used to return quartile values by setting the nth percentile to the following: 0.25 for first quartile, 0.5 for second quartile, 0.75 for third quartile.
In this example, two computed value columns have been calculated. In the first computed column, the Percentile function is used on the numeric column and the nth percentile of values (0 in this case).
Percentile (Units, 0)
In the second computed column, the Percentile function is used on the numeric column, and the nth percentile of values (.25 in this case).
Percentile (Units,.25)
Table 86
State WI AZ CA CA
318
State CA FL MD NY NY
Computed 1 50 50 50 50 50
Computed 2 96 96 96 96 96
Rank
The Rank function returns the rank of a number in a column of numbers. It works as if you were to sort the list in descending order.
Rank(numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the rank is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
Note: The Rank function assigns duplicate numbers the same rank. The presence of duplicate numbers affects the ranks of subsequent numbers.
In this example, the Rank function is used for the numeric column (the column that contains the numbers to rank). The results are shown in the Computed column.
Rank(Amount)
Table 87
Rank Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 241 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 6 2 7 9 7 3 5 1 4
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
319
RankAsc
The RankAsc function returns the rank of a number in a column of numbers. It works as if you were to sort the list in ascending order. In this case, the rank of the number would be its position.
RankAsc (numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the rank is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
Note: The RankAsc function assigns duplicate numbers the same rank. The presence of duplicate numbers affects the ranks of subsequent numbers.
In this example, the RankAsc function is used on the numeric column and break_column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
RankAsc (Amount, State)
Table 88
RankAsc Example 2 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 3 6 6 1 2 5 4 7 7
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
StdDev
The StdDev function returns a standard deviation based on a sample. It is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).
StdDev (numbers, break_col)
where:
320
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the standard deviation is
calculated.
break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
Note: StdDev assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If you data represents the entire population, then compute the standard deviation using StdDevp.
Note: The standard deviation is calculated using the nonbiased or n-1 method.
Note: If a result set contains one row of data or less, the StdDev function should return an error.
In this example, the StdDev function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
StdDev (Amount)
Table 89
StdDev Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 128.11 128.11 128.11 128.11 128.11 128.11 128.11 128.11 128.11
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
StdDevp
The StdDevp function calculates and returns a standard deviation based on the entire population given as arguments. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).
StdDevp (numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the standard deviation is
calculated.
break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
321
Note: StdDevp assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, then compute the standard deviation using StdDev.
In this example, the StdDevp function is used for the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
StdDevp (Amount)
Table 90
StdDevp Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 120.79 120.79 120.79 120.79 120.79 120.79 120.79 120.79 120.79
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
Var
The Var function estimates variance based on a sample.
Var (numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the variance is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
Note: Var assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, then compute the variance usingVarp.
In this example, the Var function is used on the numeric column and break_column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Var (Amount, State)
322
Table 91
Var Example 2 City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Eagan New York Rochester Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 159 490 180 Computed 0 10,224.50 10,224.50 0 0 0 0 48,050.00 48,050.00
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI MN NY NY
Varp
The Varp function estimates variance based on the entire population.
Varp (numbers, break_col)
where:
numbers references the column that contains the numbers on which the variance is calculated. break_col is an optional parameter that references a break column.
Note: Varp assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, then compute the variance using Var.
In this example, the Varp function is used on the numeric column. The results are shown in the Computed column.
Varp (Amount)
Table 92
Varp Example City Tucson Burbank Glendale Palmetto Laurel Detroit Amount 112 240 97 70 97 208 Computed 14,589.56 14,589.56 14,589.56 14,589.56 14,589.56 14,589.56
State AZ CA CA FL MD MI
323
State MN NY NY
Trend Functions
Both the Pivot and Results sections offer trend functions, which allow you to perform statistical analysis within a sample data set of variable size.Trend functions are useful for removing data irregularities/fluctuations, analyzing data trends, and smoothing a set of data points. They are often used to reduce noise that exists when visualizing large data sets by providing aggregation capabilities at configurable window sizes. Review the following sections for information on:
General Moving Average and Moving Function Functionality Simple Moving Averages Positioning of Moving Average Results - Trailing and Centered Averages Weighted Moving Averages Exponential Moving Averages Moving Diff Moving Maximum Moving Median Moving Sum Moving Minimum Direction Of Moving Function Calculation
324
The simple mean value of all of the above twelve Sales values is:
Sum of all twelve values divided by 12 = 296 / 12 = 24.67
While having some virtue, this simple mean value does not offer any insight into analyzing the variation trend of the original values or to provide a more accurate mean value at varying points of the range. Moving Averages, on the other hand, do offer the ability to understand the trend of data by calculating many average (mean) values over the entire range of original data values. There are several variations to Moving Average calculation, the most common of these are: Simple Moving Averages, Weighted Moving Averages and Exponential Moving Averages. All of these variations are described in detail in the following sections. Additionally, other "Moving Functions": Moving Maximum, Moving Minimum, Moving Median, Moving Sum and Moving Difference whose functionality closely resembles that of Moving Averages are discussed.
If the first three Sales values were summed and then this sum was divided by 3 to give a mean value, this value would be:
(10 + 15 + 17) / 3 = 42 / 3 = 14
Trend Functions
325
Next, consider the mean of the sum of the second, third and fourth original values i.e.:
(15 + 17 + 20) / 3 = 52 / 3 = 17.33
This pattern could be repeated to reveal the mean values of the third, fourth and fifth values; fifth, sixth and seventh values and so on until all subsequent windows of three numbers are summed and their mean values obtained. The Simple Moving Averages of the original range of values for a window of 3 (i.e. in this case, a 3-Month Simple Moving Average) could be evaluated to be:
Table 93
Simple Moving Average Original Sales Values 10 15 17 20 22 20 25 27 30 35 37 40 14 17.33 19.66 20.66 22.33 24 27.33 30.66 34 37.33 3-Month Simple Moving Average
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
326
Table 94
14 14
"Centered Averages" display requires further calculations when the window is an even number and it is not available for Simple Moving Averages and other Moving Functions at this time. All "Moving Functions" in this particular implementation will display data according to the "Trailing Averages" principle. Note also that from the above two tables, "Trailing Averages" display causes the initial n-1 (where n = window size) rows of result data to have no value (rows 1 and 2 are blank in the above examples). This is the generally accepted standard for the initial "n-1" terms and is the standard adopted for the implementation of most Moving Functions. Table 95 illustrates the above monthly Sales data Simple Moving Average calculation using "Trailing Averages" display: The Simple Moving Averages of the original range of values for a window of 3 (i.e. in this case, a 3-Month Simple Moving Average) could be evaluated to be:
Table 95
3-Month Simple Moving Average Original Sales Values 10 15 17 20 22 20 25 27 30 35 37 40 14 17.33 19.66 20.66 22.33 24 27.33 30.66 34 37.33 3-Month Simple Moving Average
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Trend Functions
327
If the calculation window is said to be n, then the most recent data value in the window is multiplied by n, the next most recent multiplied by n-1, the value prior to that multiplied by n2 and so on for all values in the Window.
2 Divide the sum of all of the multiplied values by the sum of the weights to give the Weighted Moving
Average over that window.
3 Place the Weighted Moving Average value in a new column according to the trailing averages positioning
described above.
To illustrate these steps, consider if a 3-month Weighted Moving Average of Sales in December is required (using the above table of Sales values). The term "3-month" implies that the calculation "window" is 3, therefore the Weighted Moving Average calculation algorithm for this case should be:
{(Dec Sales value divided by (3 + 2 = {(40 * 3) + (37 = (120 + 74 + 35) = 229 / 6 = 38.17 * + * / 3) + (Nov Sales value * 2) + (Oct Sales value * 1)} 1) 2) + (35 * 1)} / 6 6
Or, if a 3-month Weighted Moving Average were evaluated over the entire original range of data, the results would be:
328
Table 96
3-month Weighted Moving Average Orignal Sales Values 10 15 17 20 22 20 25 27 30 35 37 40 15.12 18.17 20.5 20.67 22.83 25.17 28.17 32 35.17 38.17 3-Month Simple Moving Average
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Where: X = Current EMA (i.e. EMA to be calculated) C = Current original data value K = Smoothing Constant P = Previous EMA (The first EMA in the range to be calculated is arbitrary and can be the corresponding original data value or, often, a Simple Moving Average value.
Trend Functions
329
Where: K = Smoothing Constant = 2 / (1 + n) n = number of periods for EMA i.e. the Window to calculate. This rather complex calculation is, perhaps, best illustrated by example. Consider the table of monthly Sales values as shown previously:
If we calculated the Exponential Moving Average in a similar fashion to the 3-Month Simple Moving Average, we would perform the following steps:
5 For the first Exponential Moving Average, use the first original data value (in this case, that for the Month of
"Jan").
6 For subsequent values, follow the calculation according to the above formula.
X = (K * (C - P)) + P as indicated below:
Table 97
X = (K * (C - P)) + P Example Sales 10 15 17 20 22 20 Calculation (K * (C - P)) +P = Original value (0.5 * (15 - 10)) + 10 (0.5 * (17 - 12.5)) + 12.5 (0.5 * (20 - 14.75)) + 14.75 (0.5 * (22 - 17.375)) + 17.375 (0.5 * (20 - 19.6875)) + 19.6875 Exponential Moving Average 10 12.5 14.75 17.375 19.688 19.844
330
Sales 25 27 30 35 37 40
Calculation (K * (C - P)) +P (0.5 * (25 - 19.844)) + 19.844 (0.5 * (27 - 22.422)) + 22.422 (0.5 * (30 - 24.711)) + 24.711 (0.5 * (35 - 27.355)) + 27.355 (0.5 * (37 - 31.178)) + 31.178 (0.5 * (40 - 34.089)) + 34.089
Moving Diff
The MovingDiff function operates over a moving window of values, and returns the difference between the current value and the value at the beginning of the window. This function is similar to the MovingMax function. No Weighted or Exponential can be calculated for this function. The MovingDiff function takes the following arguments:
MovingDiff (column, window, break_col)
where:
column (required) Specify the column that contains the numeric fact on which the
Moving Function column value is calculated. If you are applying the function from the Pivot section, you can only use a column that has already been added to the Facts pane of the Data Layout.
window (optional) Specify a moving window of values from the Column on which the
Moving Function gets calculated The window value must be a positive integer of value equal to or less than the total number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If the window value is an interger of greater value than the number of values in the Column, then the window value defaults to the number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If no window value is specified, then the window value defaults to 3.
break column (optional) Specify the name of the column on which to perform the
Moving Function calculation. The break column refers to the rows of similar valued data cell within the Pivot or Results section. The following results would occur if you used the Moving Diff function with a Window of 3 (MovingDiff(Sales,3).
Trend Functions
331
Table 98
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Moving Maximum
The MovingMax (Moving Maximum) function operates over a moving window of values. For each Window, the MovingMax returns the maximum value found in the Window. This function is similar to the Simple Moving Average, No Weighted or Exponential can be calculated for this function. The MovingMax function takes the following arguments:
MovingMax (column, window, break_col)
where:
column (required) Specify the column that contains the numeric fact on which the
Moving Function column value is calculated. If you are applying the function from the Pivot section, you can only use a column that has already been added to the Facts pane of the Data Layout.
window (optional) Specify a moving window of values from the Column on which the
Moving Function gets calculated The window value must be a positive integer of value equal to or less than the total number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If the window value is an interger of greater value than the number of values in the Column, then the window value defaults to the number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If no window value is specified, then the window value defaults to 3.
332
break column (optional) Specify the name of the column on which to perform the Moving Function calculation. The break column refers to the rows of similar valued data cell within the Pivot or Results section.
The following results would occur if you used the MovingMax function with a Window of 3 (MovingMax(Sales,3).
Table 99
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Moving Median
The MovingMed function operates over a moving window of values. For each Window, the MovingMed returns the middle value (in terms of rank) found in the Window. If the Window value is an even number, the simple mean value of the two middle ranking values should be used. No Weighted or Exponential can be calculated for this function. The MovingMed function takes the following arguments:
MovingMed (column, window, break_col)
where:
column (required) Specify the column that contains the numeric fact on which the
Moving Function column value is calculated. If you are applying the function from the Pivot section, you can only use a column that has already been added to the Facts pane of the Data Layout.
window (optional) Specify a moving window of values from the Column on which the
Moving Function gets calculated The window value must be a positive integer of value equal to or less than the total number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value).
Trend Functions
333
If the window value is an interger of greater value than the number of values in the Column, then the window value defaults to the number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If no window value is specified, then the window value defaults to 3.
break column (optional) Specify the name of the column on which to perform the Moving Function calculation. The break column refers to the rows of similar valued data cell within the Pivot or Results section.
The following results would occur if you used the MovingMed function with a Window of 3 (MovingMed(Sales,3).
Table 100
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Moving Sum
MovingSum (Moving Sum) function operates over a moving window of values. For each Window, the MovingSum returns the sum of values found in the window. No Weighted or Exponential can be calculated for this function. The MovingSum function takes the following arguments:
MovingSum (column, window, break_col)
where:
column (required) Specify the column that contains the numeric fact on which the
Moving Function column value is calculated. If you are applying the function from the Pivot section, you can only use a column that has already been added to the Facts pane of the Data Layout.
334
window (optional) Specify a moving window of values from the Column on which the
Moving Function gets calculated The window value must be a positive integer of value equal to or less than the total number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If the window value is an interger of greater value than the number of values in the Column, then the window value defaults to the number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If no window value is specified, then the window value defaults to 3.
break column (optional) Specify the name of the column on which to perform the
Moving Function calculation. The break column refers to the rows of similar valued data cell within the Pivot or Results section. The following results would occur if you used the Moving Sum function with a Window value of 3.
Table 101
Moving Sum Example Orignal Sales Values 10 15 17 20 22 20 25 27 30 35 37 40 42 52 59 62 72 72 82 92 102 112 3-Month MovingSum Average
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Moving Minimum
The MovingMin function operates over a moving window of values. For each Window, the Moving Minimum returns the minimum value found in the Window. This function is similar to the Simple Moving Average. No Weighted or Exponential can be calculated for this function. The MovingMin function takes the following arguments:
MovingMin (column, window, break_col)
where:
Trend Functions
335
column (required) Specify the column that contains the numeric fact on which the
Moving Function column value is calculated. If you are applying the function from the Pivot section, you can only use a column that has already been added to the Facts pane of the Data Layout.
window (optional) Specify a moving window of values from the Column on which the
Moving Function gets calculated The window value must be a positive integer of value equal to or less than the total number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If the window value is an interger of greater value than the number of values in the Column, then the window value defaults to the number of rows in the Column (within any Break Column value). If no window value is specified, then the window value defaults to 3.
break column (optional) Specify the name of the column on which to perform the Moving Function calculation. The break column refers to the rows of similar valued data cell within the Pivot or Results section.
The following results would occur if you used the Moving Minimum function with a Window value of 3. Similar to Simple Moving Averages above, note that the values in the "3-Month Moving Minimum" column are positioned according to the trailing averages.
Table 102
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
336
subsequent row of displayed fact data. This downward movement is evident in the Table Section data (which has been used in the examples shown above) since, in a Table Section, each new instance of fact data can only be represented as a new row. Other sections, however, such as Pivot and Chart allow the possibility for fact data to be represented in more than one directional axis. In the case of Pivot and Chart Sections, therefore, you can specify the direction of Moving Function calculation. To illustrate the effect of changing the direction of Moving Function calculation, consider the previously shown Table data:
Table 103
Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Adding a new Computed Item column to display a 3-Month Moving Difference would yield:
Table 104
Trend Functions
337
30 35 37
5 5 7
Consider, however, if the "Month" and "Sales" data were oriented as follows (as could be done in a Pivot Section):
Jan Sales 10 Feb 15 Mar 17 Apr 20 May 22 Jun 20 Jul 25 Aug 27 Sep 30 Oct 35 Nov 37 Dec 40
If a new Computed Item were added, to represent a 3-Month Moving Difference, and the Moving Function calculation direction was still down each column, this would result in null values being represented for the Computed Item (as below) since there would only be one fact value per column (this would not be enough fact occurrences to satisfy a 3-term Moving Difference).
Jan Sales 3-Month Moving Difference 10 Feb 15 Mar 17 Apr 20 May 22 Jun 20 Jul 25 Aug 27 Sep 30 Oct 35 Nov 37 Dec 40
If, instead, the Moving Function calculation direction were specified to be along each row (i.e. horizontally from right to left) the Moving Difference Computed Item would yield the "expected" results since the source "Sales" Fact data cells would be examined in their "correct" left-to-right sequence. That is, the following display would result:
Jan Sales 3-Month Moving Difference 10 Feb 15 Mar 17 7 Apr 20 5 May 22 5 Jun 20 0 Jul 25 3 Aug 27 7 Sep 30 5 Oct 35 5 Nov 37 7 Dec 40 5
338
Chapter
Applying Sorts
13
This chapter discusses features that enable Interactive Reporting to sort data in various reports. It includes information or sort lines, single and nested sorts in the Query and Results section, and complex sorting by values and labels in the report sections.
In This Chapter Sorting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Simple Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Sort Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Complex Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Applying Sorts
339
Sorting Data
Sorting simplifies the process of data analysis. After data is sorted, the answers to questions are often readily at your fingertips. Sorting is also very useful for ranking data to reveal business trends and margins.
Unsorted Results
Sorted Results
You can perform simple and complex sorts depending on your requirements. You can sort individual data items or use the Sort line to sort items in reference to associated data values. These complex sorts can be nested, so that the sorted data reflects the hierarchical relationships between data items.
Simple Sorts
If you only want to sort a single Request item, report row, or column, you can use the Sort buttons on the toolbar to quickly order the data. If you apply simple sort conditions in the Query section, the database server sorts the data while processing the query before it is retrieved to your desktop. Or you can sort data on your desktop in Results or report sections. The data associated with a selected item is sorted in ascending or descending order as you wish.
Sort Lines
Interactive Reporting sort lines have two functions:
To maintain a record of sort conditions that you have applied to the data set. To enable you to specify compound and nested sorts.
340
Applying Sorts
Sort lines take on a different appearance in each section depending on the data presentation and the types of sorts available.
In the Query, Results, Table, and Report Designer sections, sort lines are drag and drop command lines similar to Request and Filter lines. In the Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery sections, sort lines are list driven and include provisions for sorting by aggregate calculations, such as averages and counts.
Tip: You can move, size, dock, or hide the Sort line. To toggle the Sort line, click the Sort button on
Complex Sorting
In addition to performing simple sorts, you can use Interactive Reporting to perform complex sorting. Review the following sections for information on:
Complex Sorting in the Query, Results, and Table Sections Complex Sorting in Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery Reports
The appearance and functionality of the Sort line is nearly identical in the Query, Results, and Table sections. In each section, the Sort line uses a drag-and-drop interface similar to the Request and Filter lines.
Using this feature, you can drag items to the sort line and request them to be sorted in sequence to yield nested sort results. When you sort more than one data item at a time, the left to right order of data on the Sort line dictates the sort order and creates a nested effect. Data is sorted in the order you specify. The leftmost item on the Sort line is the primary sort. Items to the right are sorted in progression, each within the categories of the preceding item. For example, if the first item is State, the second item City, and the third item Store, States are sorted alphabetically by name. Within each state, cities are sorted by name. Within each city, stores are sorted. Nested effects are based solely on the placement of items on the Sort line. If the item order on the Request line differs from the order in the Content pane, the sort is still nested, but the visual impact is not as pronounced.
Complex Sorting
341
The key difference between the sections lies in where the sorting is performed:
In the Query section, the database server sorts items placed on the Sort line as the query is processed. The data is returned already presorted to the Results section. In the Results and Table sections, items placed on the Sort line are sorted on your desktop.
The bottom line effect is the same whether you apply sort conditions locally in the Results or Table section or on the database server in the Query Section. Depending on the situation and the needs of your business, one method or the other may be preferable.
In Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery reports, you generally want to override the default sort order and sort dimensional data with reference to other data. In these sections, you can use the Sort line to impose a sort condition for each dimensional data item in your report, and to nest your sort conditions at each hierarchical level of the report from the outside in. The Sort line includes three drop-down menus used to define the sort conditions. The contents of the menus vary depending on the data items in query.
Tip: Data in Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery sections is sorted alphabetically by default. You can use
the sort buttons on the Standard toolbar to perform simple sorts on selected report items and reverse the sort order. (See Simple Sorts on page 340 for more information.)
Sort Items
The Sort drop-down menu lists the data items that can be sorted. Each dimensional item included in the report (name and date) is listed in this menu.
Reference Items
The By drop-down menu lists items used as a basis for a complex sort condition (for example, sorting Cities by the revenue generated in each). The drop-down menu includes each numerical data item in the report as well as the keyword entry "label." These choices provide two ways to sort the dimensional item specified in the Sort menu:
Sorting by Label By default Interactive Reporting sorts dimensional data items alphabetically by name when you create your report this is equivalent to sorting by labels. When selected, label indicates that the item chosen from the Sort list is sorted by label or name, rather than by reference to corresponding numeric data values in the report. Sorting by Value Sorting by a numeric data item orders each value of the target item chosen from the Sort list by its corresponding numeric value in the Value list.
342
Applying Sorts
Sorting by values produces an entirely different sort order. For example, your chart may list each state in which your company has made sales revenue and the total cost-of-sales for each. The states are initially listed in alphabetical order. When you sort by cost-of-goods, the states are ranked in order by each corresponding cost-of-sales figure.
Functions
The Using drop-down menu contains aggregate statistical functions that are available when you sort by values. The functions generally duplicate the data functions available in the active section. The default function for sorting is Sum. When you sort by values, Interactive Reporting sorts dimensional data by the corresponding numeric values of the referenced item (for example, sorting states by the sum total of the cost of goods sold in each state).
4 If desired, select an aggregate function from the Using drop-down list when sorting by values.
The Using drop-down menu is not available when you sort by labels.
Complex Sorting
343
344
Applying Sorts
Glossary
Adaptive Report Level The level of privilege that a user can interact with an Interactive Reporting document. The adaptive report levels are View Only; View and Process; Analyze; Analyze and Process; Query and Analyze; and Data Model, Query, and Analyze. When a document is published, groups of users are granted access to it with specific Adaptive Report level privileges. ADR (also called as sync) See automatic distributed refresh. aggregate filter Filters placed on aggregated request line items or aggregated meta topic items. API Application Programmer Interface API Socket (DaAPISock) The API (such as ODBC, SQL Net, and so on) or protocol level information used when connecting to a database that has been abstracted in an API Socket. Interactive Reporting have one API socket for each supported API/communication protocols. application aerver A panework for developing applications that provides fundamental capabilities required by many applications such as session and resource management, and security. auditing The monitoring of Interactive Reporting Repository objects to determine usage patterns. automatic distributed refresh The process of synchronizing locally saved documents and the version in the repository. auto-join An administrator can configure a connection file to cause joins to occur automatically for users using the Auto-Join feature. Auto-Join can be configured one of three ways: Best Guess, Custom, and Server-Defined. auto-process The automatic processing of a query.
axes Straight lines on a chart used for measurement and categorization. Typically the X-axis and the Z-axis are both used for categories while the Y-axis is used for quantification (for example, Facts/Values). Pie charts only use the X-axis for its categories and the Y-axis for its Facts/Values. catalog A collection of database tables and local results. This is the information the user can use in a data model or query. Catalog pane Shows a list of elements available to the active section. For example, if Query is the active section, the Catalog pane displays a list of database tables. If Pivot is the active section, the Catalog pane displays a list of results columns. If Dashboard is the active section, the Catalog pane displays a list of embeddable sections, graphic tools, and control tools. categories Groupings by which the data is organized (for example, month). CGI See Common Gateway Interface. chart A graphical representation of data. Users create charts to convert raw data into eloquent, visual information. Chart section With a varied selection of chart types, and a complete arsenal of OLAP tools like group and drilldown, the Chart section is built to support simultaneous graphic reporting and ad-hoc analysis. client/server A network architecture in which each computer or process on the network is either a client (requests information) or a server (delivers requested information).
Glossary
345
clustered bar charts Occurs when the categories are viewed side by side within a given category, useful for side by side category analysis. Clustering is only done with vertical bar charts. Common Facilities One of the four categories of objects defined by the Object Management Architecture (OMA). The Common Facilities is a collection of services that many applications may share, but the services are not as fundamental as Object Services. For example, Print Facility and Mobile Agent Facility. computed item A virtual column (as opposed to a column that is physically stored in the database or cube) that can be calculated by the database during a query, or by an Interactive Reporting in the Results section. They are calculations of new data based on functions, data items, and operators provided in the dialog box. They can be included in reports or reused to calculate other data. connection file See interactive reporting database connection file. Controls Folder Contains prebuilt items that can be added to your Dashboard section, such as list boxes, radio buttons, and command buttons. You can then attach scripts to the controls embedded in the Dashboard section to execute actions. correlated subqueries Subqueries that are evaluated once for every row in the parent query. A correlated sub query is created by joining a topic item in the subquery with one of the topic items in the parent query. cross join Creates a query where none of the tables is joined. Every row in one table is joined to every row in another table. cube The data in OLAP databases (MS Plato, Essbase, MetaCube) is stored in 3-dimensional cubes, which is different from standard relational databases (2dimensional). Cubes are made up of dimensions and measures. A cube may have dozens of dimensions. DaConnect (aka DaConn) An Interactive Reportings main connectivity class. Contains all the connectivity specific information. Instance of a connection class is made whenever Interactive Reporting needs to connect to any database.
Daemon-mode BQ The Hyperion client/server executable. It is spawned in daemon mode by node JREs. The role of the daemon-mode BQ is simply to execute database queries and return results. Dashboard Allows you to build and deploy analytic applications. Analytical applications focus on delivering significant prepackaged business content that is encapsulated within an application. With Interactive Reporting, customers and independent software vendors can leverage their knowledge of industry specific best practices and assemble their own analytical applications for deployment to end users using the Web. Combining embeddable Report sections with enhanced Dashboard controls into a visual workspace and hooking up interactivity between these controls and the native Brio Software application, an application designer can quickly create a variety of robust applications. Dashboard Home A button that returns you to the
Dashboard section designated as the Dashboard Home section. If you have only one Dashboard section,
Dashboard Home returns to that section. If you have several Dashboard sections, the default Dashboard Home is the top Dashboard section in the Catalog pane. In Design mode you can specify another Dashboard section to be the Dashboard Home section. DaSession When a client needs to perform an operation such as select, insert, update on a database, a session is created. The life time of a session synchronizes with the operations duration. Sessions are created when a client needs to perform operations on the database and are destroyed when the operation is considered complete. data function Computes aggregate values, including averages, maximums, counts and other statistics, which summarize groupings of data. You can use data functions to aggregate and compute data from the server before it reaches the Results section, or compute different statistics for aggregated totals and items in the other analysis sections. data model A representation of a subset of actual database tables that acts as a menu for the query-builder. Data models are the sources for building the Request, Filter, and Sort lines in a query section. You create a data model by dragging database tables from the Catalog pane into the Content pane. The data model displays database tables graphically as topics when they are in the Content pane.
346
Glossary
Data models can be distributed through the Hyperion System 9 BI + repository and used by end users to create their own queries. database function A predefined formula in a database. database server A computer that stores database management system software (DBMS, for example, Oracle, Sybase, Essbase), and a database shared by a network of computer clients. Most databases are used in a client/server environment. By storing data on a single, powerful machine on a network, the data is centralized and accessible to many users. The server ensures that the data is maintained correctly and serves as a traffic cop to regulate client machine access to the data. The servers computing power is also useful in computing and filtering data from the database before it reaches your workstation. For small or localized databases, your own computer can act as both database server and client. datatype The type of data stored in a specific column in a database. For example, data can be stored as a numeric datatype. date group A feature in the Results and Table sections that separates a date into Year, Quarter and Month columns. The display format for the new Month column is automatically set to mmm so that the month names sort chronologically (as opposed to alphabetically) in the report sections. Quarters are based on the calendar year, beginning January 1. designer A client/server-based tool that delivers query, analysis, and reporting capabilities and centralized solution administration for developers, database administrators, and system administrators. design guide Design guides are similar to grids in that objects automatically snap to line up with the design guides. Design guides are placed at user-specified locations in the work area. There are horizontal and vertical design guides. The design guides will draw as a blue line across the work area, with the ability to drag the guide to any new location. design mode A toggled environment used to build and modify Dashboard sections. In Design mode, you build Dashboard sections with an array of prebuilt control items and graphic items.
Designers can switch out of design mode to test Dashboard features and deploy them to end users. Design mode is only available in Dashboard sections. Interactive Reporting Navigator users cannot switch to Dashboard Design mode. detail view Displays a topic as a database table. When you select Detail view, the database returns ten sample rows from the associated table. Each topic item displays as a database field. Detail view enables users to browse a sample of the raw data, which is useful when unfamiliar with the data model or the underlying data. Users cannot view a meta topic in Detail view. dimension In an OLAP database cube, categories of information are called dimensions. Examples of dimensions may be Location, Products, Stores, and Time. In an Interactive Reporting, related, nonquantifiable items in a topic are also referred to as dimensions, such as Contact or Store Name. dimension (legend dimension) The current axis categorization or grouping method. This can be set to the X, Y, or Z-axis for most chart types. For line and area charts it can only be set to the Y or Z-axis. For pie charts it is always set to the X-axis. When you change the Legend Dimension the color is distributed along the new axis you change to. dimension tab In the Pivot section, the tab that enables you to pivot data between rows and columns. dimension table Consists of numerous attributes about a specific business process. Each row in a dimension table is unique. drill anywhere Allows you to drill into and add items to pivot reports residing in the Results section, without having to return to the Query section or trying to locate the item in the Catalog pane. Drill Anywhere items are broken out as new pivot label items. drill to detail Allows you to retrieve items from a data model that are not in the Results section, without having to rerun the original query. This feature provides the ability to interactively query the database and filter the data that is returned. Drill to Detail sets a filter on the query based on the users selection and adds the returned value as a new pivot label item automatically. drilldown Allows you to progressively narrow your focus on a selected chart category. Very useful when you have too many categories on a particular axis.
Glossary
347
embedded section A Interactive Reporting section that is embedded in a Smart report or other Interactive Reporting section. All embedded sections maintain live data content and formatting from the original section. Reprocessing the query, or modifying the original section automatically updates the embedded section display. Explorer A client/server-based tool that delivers query, analysis, and reporting capabilities for power users who need to directly access data sourcesor to explore the information organized in prebuilt data models stored in the repository. Expression Line Displays displays the JavaScript syntax for each item displayed in a report. Use this line to build equations in the Report section. For ease of use, it can be undocked and resized. extranet An intranet that is partially accessible to authorized outsiders. Extranets are secured by user names and passwords. fact table A table that stores business activity measures. Most fact tables are extremely large. Each row in a fact table contains numeric measures (fully additive measures, nonadditive measures and/or semiadditive measures) and foreign keys to each dimension table. facts The numeric values that are broken up in the body of the Pivot section. To add facts to the Pivot, put Results columns from the Catalog pane into the Outliners Facts pane. Facts are the numeric values in a relational database that are available to analyze. In an OLAP Query, they are called measures. facts/values The data that is being visually represented, usually a numeric amount (for example, $15,000) file server A computer and storage device dedicated to storing files. filter Constraints placed on topic items or request line items to filter them to a certain set of values. Filters appear on the filter line in Interactive Reporting. For example, although the database may display worldwide sales figures for all stores, you may only want to see sales for stores in Germany. Filters make data sets retrieved through a query more efficient and manageable by filtering out unnecessary information.
filters In the OLAPQuery section, filters enable you to define and apply filters to the query once Top or Side Labels have been added to the query. You set a filter by applying comparison operators on the values for a specific member. Additional server-specific functions are available based on the selected OLAP database cube. Filters are built to include or exclude data according to specific criteria. Filters can be set on any level in a dimension. However, they must be one of the labels in the Outliner. Filters can be made of members of one of the dimensions or selected by a measure. OLE DB for OLAP has other filter operator types (Top N, Top Sum, Top N %, Bottom N, Bottom N %, Bottom Sum.) Essbase and MetaCube have their own operator types. In Essbase and MetaCube, filters can be done on measures. In OLE DB for OLAP, filters cannot be placed on measures. foreign key A database column or set of columns included in the definition of a referential integrity constraint. fully additive measure Attributes in a table that can have their values added together across any dimension. grain The level of detail at which measures in a table are recorded is referred to as the grain. grouping columns This feature, in the Results and Table sections, creates a new column in a dataset by grouping data from an already existing column. Grouping columns consolidate nonnumeric data values into more general group values and map the group values to a new column in the dataset. hardwire mode In hardwire mode whenever the OLAP Query is changed, the database is queried to fetch new cube data. In contrast, process mode is manually controlled. You add or remove several items to the Outliner, and then press Process to query the database. When determining whether to use hardwire mode or process mode, consider the size of the cube in which you are working. hierarchy In an OLAP database cube, a hierarchy organizes a dimensions levels and corresponding members into parent and child relationships. For the levels in a Location dimension, the hierarchy would have Country as the parent of the child City and City as the parent of the child Address.
348
Glossary
home Abstract base interface that some Lightning interfaces derive from. Provides basic methods to manipulate and create Bean objects. HTML See Hypertext Markup Language. Hypertext Markup Language A programming language used to create World Wide Web pages, with hyperlinks and tags that explain how to format the information on the screen. icon view Shrinks a selected topic to an icon in the Content pane. The topic remains part of the data model, but is deactivated and can not be accessed by the query. Associated items are removed from the Request line when a topic is made into an icon, and the topic is not recognized as joined to other topics. Icon view is helpful in restricting the use of server time when a topic is infrequently used, and does not have to be active at all times. imported Files Excel, Text, or CSV files imported into Interactive Reporting. The information in the file goes into a table or a results object. Imported results can be used in other queries (like regular results) for local join purposes. Indexes Indexes are created in a database to increase the performance of data retrieval. Just as book indexes help to locate specific information faster, database indexes provide a faster access path to table data. Indexes are created on one or more columns of a table. integrity constraints Constraints on tables that guarantee the data adheres to certain business rules. Integrity constraints are defined with a table and are stored as part of the table definition, central to the database data dictionary, so that all database applications adhere to the same set of rules. internal function Built-in formulas, defined in the Interactive Reporting application.
interactive reporting database connection file Encapsulate and store connection information used to connect Hyperion applications to a database. Interactive Reporting Database Connection file specify the database API (ODBC, SQL*Net, etc.), database software, the network address of the database server, and your database user name. Once created, a user can specify the Interactive Reporting Database Connection file and database password and logon. An Interactive Reporting Database connection file is required for a Interactive Reporting document to use a database. the file extension is .oce. Interactive Reporting Repository A specific group of tables created using Interactive Reporting on a database server and used to store Interactive Reporting document objects, including data models and standard queries. Administrators can use the Designer client to upload these objects to the repository for end-users to download, providing a template for query and report building. Documents built from repository objects can be versioncontrolled or audited through a link to the repository. internet A global network connecting millions of computers. Unlike online services, which are centrally controlled, the Internet is decentralized by design. Each Internet computer, called a host, is independent. interval Equal subdivisions within a given scale. The interval can be set manually or to best fit. intranet A network belonging to an organization, usually a corporation, accessible only by organization members, employees or other authorization users. Intranet Web sites look and act just like any other Web site, but the firewall surrounding an intranet fends off unauthorized access. ISAPI This is a shared library that implements HTTP using Microsofts Web server plug-in API (ISAPI). Thus it is appropriate for customers with Microsoft Web servers. Functionally it is equivalent to our CGI. Its advantage is that it is far more scalable than a CGI executable. item A visual representation of a database column that is a member of a topic in the Query section. Items are used to create queries and reports. For example, the Customer Topic may have items including Name, Address, and Phone. You select items from data model topics to build the Request, Filter, and Sort lines in the query section.
Glossary
349
JavaScript The scripting language for Interactive Reporting products. Interactive Reporting 8.0 include the Netscape JavaScript interpreter (version 1.4). JavaScript and Dashboards Object Model allow application developers to use the full functionality of the industrystandard scripting language to control Interactive Reporting applications. job repository A set of database tables that store a queue of scheduled jobs. There can be multiple job repositories in an organization. join A relational database concept indicating a link between two topics. A join typically occurs between identical or similar items within different topics. Joins allow row records in different tables to be linked on the basis of shared information in a column field. For example, a row record in the Customer table is joined to a related record in the Orders table when the Customer ID value for the record is the same in each table. This allows the order record to be linked with the record of the customer who placed the order. If you request items from unjoined topics, the database server has no way to correlate the information between the two tables and leads to awkward datasets and run-on queries. Interactive Reporting display joins visually in the workspace between topics to indicate joins between database tables. Users can also create new joins that are not already specified in the database. join path A predetermined join configuration for a data model. Administrators create join paths for users to select the type of data model needed in a user-friendly prompt upon processing a query. Join paths ensure that the correct tables in a complex data model are used in a query. JRE (Java Runtime Environment) This is the Java interpreter used to run the Java Server. legend box An informative box containing color-keyed labels to identify the data categories of a given dimension. layer Stacks a single object in relative position (sends back and front, or brings forward or backward) to other objects.
level Similar types of members in an OLAP database cube are grouped at the same level. For example, using the members listed in a Location dimension, France, the USA, and Japan belong to the Country level. Paris, Palo Alto, and Tokyo belong to the City level. 35 Main Street belongs to the Address level. limit joins Joins between a database table and a local results object. The topic item being joined is limited by the values of the column being joined in of the local results object. A limit join is one of the options that you can choose in a Modify Join operation between a topic item and a local results item. linked data model Documents that are linked to a master copy in a repository. When changes are made to the master, users are automatically updated with the changes when they connect their duplicate copy to the database. local computed meta topic items Computed item definitions evaluated by the Interactive Reporting results engine. Local computed items are created to be meta topic items. They can be dragged to the request line like regular topic items. The only difference is that the results engine evaluates these items as opposed to the database. local joins A join between a local results object and a database table or another local results object. Interactive Reporting perform the actual join in this case. local filters Filters placed on the local dataset in the Results section, as opposed to the Query section. Filters in the Query section restrict the data retrieved by the query to the desktop. Local filters screen data from view in the Results set; although it is still there, you cannot see the data that has been excluded or use it in reports unless the filter is removed. local Results Results of other queries within the same data model. These results can be dragged into the data model to be used in local joins. Local results are displayed in the catalog when requested. locked data model Data Models that are locked cannot be modified by a user. Manager See Server.
350
Glossary
master data model A Data Model that exists independently and has multiple queries that reference it as a source. When using a master data model, the text Locked Data Model appears in the Content pane of the Query section. This means that the data model is linked to the master data model displayed in the Data Model section, which may be hidden by an administrator. MDX (Multi Dimensional eXpression) The language used to give instructions to OLE DB for OLAP- compliant databases (MS Plato), as SQL is the language used for relational databases. When you build the OLAPQuery sections Outliner, Interactive Reporting translate your requests into MDX instructions. When you process the query, MDX is sent to the database server. The server returns a collection of records to your desktop that answer your query. See SQL. measures Numeric values in an OLAP database cube that are available for analysis. Measures may be margin, cost of goods sold, unit sales, budget amount, and so on. See Facts. members In an OLAP database cube, members are the content values for a dimension. In the location dimension, they could be Palo Alto, Paris, Tokyo, 35 Main Street, USA, France, Japan, and so on. These are all member values for the location dimension. metatopic A customized, virtual topic, built from regular topics that reflects the exact topic and item structure of database tables. Metatopics allow items from disparate topics to be consolidated in a single topic, simplifying its appearance and reducing its conceptual resemblance to the underlying database structure. You can choose to view a data model in terms of its original topics, metatopics, or a combination of both. metadata Data about data. Stored in database tables, metadata describes the history, content, and function of database tables, columns and joins in understandable business terms. Metadata can overcome the awkward names or ambiguous abbreviations often used in a database. For example, in a table named CUST_OLD, metadata may use a descriptive business name, such as Inactive Customers.
mime type A browser mapping of a file type to either a helper application or a plug-in. When a browser attempts to open a file of a particular mime type, it either loads the associated plug-in or launches the associated helper application. A files mime type is determined either by a) the file extension or b) the HTTP header. Plug-ins tell browsers what mime types they support and what file extensions correspond to that mime type. Hyperions web based products support the following mime types: application/x-brioquery mime type (for .bqy files). This is the default mime type our web based products support and are ordinary Hyperion files. application/x-brioquerydata (for .bqd files). These are data files in text or Excel format, whose extension has been changed to .bqd. When a Hyperion Web client is launched to open a BQD file, it imports the data and executes any Interactive Reporting Studio or Interactive Reporting Web Client script or JavaScript the file contains. morphing Mechanism by which Hyperions web based products provide document security. multidimensional database A database that stores data in a format often referred to as a cube, such Essbase, MS OLAP, MetaCube, and so on. See also Relational database and OLAP database. nonadditive measure Attributes in a table that cannot be added across any dimension, such as a percentage value (for example, margin rate). NSAPI A shared library that implements HTTP using Netscapes Web server plug-in API (NSAPI). It is equivalent to our CGI. Its advantage is that it is far more scalable than a CGI executable. Nesting Nesting means that one set of data values appears as a sub-division within each of the data values at a higher level of data. For example in the Pivot section, if you place more than one data label in an Outliner panel, the Pivot report displays the second set of labels inside each of the labels of the first data items. The second labels are nested within the first. This means they represent sub-divisions with another "higher level" category. null value A null value is absent of data. Null values are not equal to zero. OCE See interactive reporting database connection file.
Glossary
351
OCE Wizard Wizard or set of screens used to create a new OCE or modify an existing OCE. OLAP database A database that stores its information in cubes. Cubes contain dimensions and measures. A cube can have dozens of dimensions. Cubes are built to hold aggregated data, which anticipate how users think about business models. Cubes deliver this information efficiently and quickly. OLAPQuery section Analyzes and interacts with data stored in an OLAP cube. When you use Interactive Reporting to connect to an OLAP cube, the document immediately opens an OLAPQuery section. The OLAPQuery section displays the structure of the cube as a hierarchical tree in the Catalog pane. Queries are built by dragging measures and dimension levels or members directly into the Outliner panes. OOA Object Oriented Analysis. OOA&D Object-Oriented Analysis & Design. IOpen Client DBLib API to connect to Sybase, Redbrick, SQL Server, and so on. Open Metadata Interpreter The Tables, Columns, Joins, Lookups and Remarks tabs available in the connection wizard when you edit a custom metadata source. These tabs allow Hyperion administrators to specify a customer source of metadata that can be accessed through SQL statements, and provided to end users with data models. Outliners Drag-and-drop command lines used in the Pivot, Chart, OLAPQuery and Report sections. Each Outliner pane corresponds to a specific layout element of the report. When an item is dragged to an Outliner pane, the item assumes the layout attributes of the respective report element. Data appears simultaneously in the Content pane with the appropriate formatting. pivot dimension row or column of labels that corresponds to an item in the Catalog pane. Pivot section The section used to create crosstab reports and analyze data. pivot table Analytical tools that resemble spreadsheets or crosstabular reports. A pivot table overlays a dynamic datacube, which allows data to be sliced and diced for adhoc, interactive, and multidimensional analysis.
pivoting In the Pivot section, the ability to change a label from a top to a side (or a side to a top) orientation with a simple click and swing of the labels Dimension tab. plot area The area bounded by the X-, Y-, and Z-axis. For pie charts, it is the rectangular area immediately surrounding the pie. predefined drill paths Enables a user to drill directly to the next level of detail, as defined in the data model. primary key A database column or set of columns included in the table definition of the PRIMARY KEY constraint. Primary key values uniquely identify the rows in a table. Only one primary key is defined per table. query A set of database instructions to return an answer set to a specific question. Each row returned in the Results section of a document is an answer to the question posed in the Query section. query computed items Item definitions created by the user. This can include other request line items or topic items and or database functions. The definition is sent to the database and the database evaluates them. Query Log Log of all SQL statements sent to the database (also referred to as SQL Log). relational database A database that stores its information in tables related or joined to each other by common pieces of information called keys. Tables are subdivided into column fields that contain related information. Column fields have parents and children. For example, the Customer table may have columns including Name, Address, and ID number. Each table contains row records that describe information about a singular entity, object, or event, such as a person, product, or transaction. Row records are segmented by column fields. Rows contain the data that you retrieve from the database. Database tables are linked by Joins. (See also join) report Group In the report section, embedded reports and tables are grouped by other data items. Items placed in the Groups Outliner break information into these dimensional groupings. For example, your table may include the name, contact information, and sales for each of your distributors. This table gains in clarity when broken into groupings that classify the stores by geographical region, year, or both.
Glossary
352
Report section A dynamic, analytical report writer, that provides users with complex report layouts and easy to use report building tools. Pivot tables, tables, and charts can be embedded in a report. The report structure is divided into group headers and body areas, with each body area containing a table of data. Tables are created with dimension columns and fact columns. These tables are elastic structures. Multiple tables can be ported into each band, each originating from the same or different result sets. repository Central location used to store data models, queries and queries with reports. Repository is usually a database chosen by the user. Request Line Holds the list of items requested from the database server and that will appear in the users results. Request Line items Columns listed in the request line. Results section A section in an Interactive Reporting document that contains the dataset derived from a query. Data is massaged in the Results section for use in the report sections. run mode A toggled environment used to test Dashboard sections. It simulates a Navigator users view of the section. In Run mode, you can not add any features, but you can use features that are part of the deployed Dashboard sections. See also Dashboard and design mode. scalar function Scalar functions (in contrast to data functions) do not aggregate data or compute aggregate statistics. Instead, scalar functions compute and substitute a new data value for each value associated with a data item. scale The range of values that allow you to gauge how much each category represents. This range can be either at equal intervals or at logarithmic interval. The scale can be set manually or to best fit. script A series of instructions for a computer. Scripts are activated when an event occurs, such as clicking a button or selecting an item from a drop down list. Interactive Reportings scripting language is JavaScript. Section pane Lists all the sections that are available in the current Interactive Reporting document. Section Title Bar A navigational aid under the toolbars that provides a means of moving between sections and toggling section-specific tools and gadgets, such as the outliner.
semiadditive measure Attributes in a table that can be summarized across some dimensions, but not all. server computed meta topic items Metatopic item definitions created by the user. These items can use any of the database functions available, or any of the other topic items in the data model. These items are evaluated by the database. Session Socket (DaSessionSocket) Abstracts session information specific to each database or API. simple join Retrieves rows to create a query where the values in joined columns match. slicer An axis that filters the data in an OLAPQuery. Only individual members can be used in a slicer. A slicer can be thought of as a third axis in a OLAP Query. The other axis are the Side Labels and the Top Labels. Every dimension folder contains a members subfolder named Values for that dimension. This subfolder contains the members that are eligible for the slicer. snapshot A a local (readonly) copy of table data that originates from one or more remote master tables. spring A tool which allows you to maintain O relative verticalspacingbetweendynamic objects. That is, you can "spring" one object to another so that if the first object is moved, increased or diminished, the second object moves in the same flow. sort Conditions placed on request line items to sort the results in ascending or descending order. These are displayed in the sort line in an Interactive Reporting. SQL See Structured Query Language. SQL Net Oracles native API to connect to an Oracle database. stacked charts A chart where the categories are viewed on top of one another for visual comparison. This type of chart is useful for subcategorizing within the current category. Stacking can be used from the Y- and Z-axis in all chart types except pie and line. When stacking charts the Z-axis is used as the Fact/Values axis. Stored Procedure Precoded queries in languages other than SQL. This is a feature available in some database software. Interactive Reporting can run stored procedures and retrieve the Results.
Glossary
353
Structure View A view that displays a topic as a list of component items allowing users to see and quickly select individual data items. Structure view is the default view setting. Structured Query Language The language used to give instructions to relational databases. When you build the query sections Request, Filter, and Sort lines, Interactive Reporting translate your requests into SQL instructions. When you process the query, the SQL instructions are sent to the database server. The server returns a collection of records to your desktop that answers your query. This reply is displayed as the Results section. You can look at the SQL generated by a query in the Query Log, or code a query directly in SQL using the Custom SQL window. subquery A query embedded within another query. surface values A setting in the Pivot section to base aggregate calculations on the values in the report, rather than the values in the Results section. synonym An alias for a database table or view. It is a direct reference to a table view. table The basic unit of data storage in a database. Database tables hold all of the user-accessible data. Table data is stored in rows and columns. Table Catalog Displays tables, views, and synonyms to which users have access. Users drag tables from the Table catalog to the Content pane to create data models in the Query section. Table section Used to create tabular-style reports. It is identical in functionality to the Results section, including grain level (table reports are not aggregated). Other reports can stem from a Table section. top and side labels In the Pivot section, labels are the column and row headings on the top and sides of the pivot. These define categories by which the numeric values are organized. topic A a visual representation of a database table in the Content pane. Topics are part of data models displayed in the Query section and can contain one or more items. topic items Individual items in a topic or metatopic. topics Visual representation of tables in the database, related by joins that link certain items in each topic. Each topic title bar displays the topics name. The topic shows a list of items, one for each column in the database table.
underlying values Another name for Results values. When Use Surface Values is disabled in a Pivot section, aggregate calculations are based on values in the Results section. Union/Intersection/Minus Queries Queries created to perform set operations such as Union, Intersection, and Minus. These queries are created by the Append Query option. variable filters Filters that prompt users to enter or select filter values before the queries are processed on the database. view A custom-tailored presentation of the data in one or more database tables. Views do not actually contain or store data; rather, they derive their data from the tables on which they are based, referred to as the base tables of the views. web client A Web tool that delivers query, analysis, and reporting functionality for intranet, Internet, or extranet access to information. Based on user profiles or reportlevel security, the client environment adapts in six stages from full query, analysis, and reporting with data refresh to static report viewing. Weighted averages Weighted averages can also be used to apply different levels of importance to a given item. To calculate a weight you take the expected amount divided by the actual amount. World Wide Web (WWW) A system of Internet servers that support specially formatted documents. The documents are formatted in a language called HTML (HyperText Markup Language) that supports links to other documents, as well as graphics, audio, and video files. zoom Sets the magnification of a report. Sets the magnification of the report. The report can be magnified to fit the whole page, page width or a percentage of magnification based on 100%.
Glossary
354
Index
Symbols
% Increase function, 178 % of Category function, 256 % of Column function, 177 % of Grand function, 177, 214 % of Row function, 177 (), 269 .bqtools.ini, 93 .bqy, 73 .csv, 48, 55 .sql, 72 .txt, 48, 55 .xls, 55 <, 273 <=, 273 <>, 273 =, 273 >, 273 >=, 273
Add Request Item(s) command, 122 Add Selected Items command, 197 Add Side Label command, 169 Add Sort(s) command, 122 Add Top Label command, 169 Add Totals command, 197 adding computed items, 289 footers, 84 headers, 84 sections, 82 adding computed items, 137, 181, 215, 255 adding cumulative totals, 176 adding date groups, 139 adding grouping columns, 137 adding lines to labels, 207 adding other report elements, 247 adding report groups, 245 adding totals and subtotals, 175 AddMonths function, 294 Administer Repository command, 94 aggregation, 27, 113 analyzing data based on day of week data, 303 AND, 269 Append Query command, 122 applying data functions to tables, 139 area charts, 210 to 211 ascending sorts, 141, 237, 264 Ascii function, 297 Atn function, 295 AutoAdd Columns command, 132 Automatic data type, 285 automatically adding columns (Results section), 128 Average function, 139, 177, 214, 256 Avg function, 308 Avg function, 296
Numerics
2-D bar charts, 208 2-D bar charts, using to analyze data, 208 3-D bar charts, 209 3-D View, 208
A
Abs function, 295 Add Computed Item command, 122, 132, 141, 197, 237, 264 Add Cume command, 197 Add Date Group command, 132, 141 Add Fact/Measure command, 169 Add Filter(s) command, 122 Add Grouping Column command, 132, 141
Index Symbols
355
AvgNonNull function, 309 AvgNonNull function, 296 axes, 201 axis grid lines, showing, 220
computed items, 215 Outliner, 205 Chart This Pivot command, 173 charting a pivot table, 173 charting basics, 200 charts adding computed items, 215 adding lines to labels, 207 area, 210 building, 205 combination, 212 creating, 205 creating from pivot tables, 173 Data Layout, 205 inserting text, 220 line charts, 212 multidimensional, 208 pie charts, 206 pivoting, 217 ribbon charts, 211 sorting, 37 stacked bar, 210 terminology, 200 three-dimensional, 208 three-dimensional bar, 209 two-dimensional, 206 two-dimensional bar, 208 chr function, 296 Clear command, 76 clustered bar charts properties, 232 understanding, 209 ColMax function, 310 ColMax function, 296 ColMin function, 311 ColMin function, 296 color, adding, 36 color, changing in charts, 236 Column command, 78 Column commands Add Grouping, 141 Hide, 142, 237, 264 Modify, 141 Unhide, 142, 237, 264 Column Name function, 256 column names changing, 244
B
bar, 201 bar charts 2-D, 208 3-D, 209 clustered, properties, 232 properties, 231 stacked, 210 three-dimensional, 209 two-dimensional, 208 bar-line charts, properties, 232 BEGINS WITH, 273 BETWEEN, 273 Border and Background command, 78 bqtbls5.ini, 112 bqtools.ini, 93 BQY files, 73 Break Total command, 132, 141 break total data functions, 139 break totals, 127, 140 browser restrictions and limitations, 71 Byte data type, 285
C
Catalog pane, 44 Ceil function, 295 changing chart color schemes and fill patterns, 233 changing chart data labels, 233 changing chart legends, 220 changing color of chart elements, lines, and text, 236 changing column names, 244 changing label nesting levels, 174 Chart, 200 chart angle and elevation, changing, 223 chart dimensions, 202 chart elements, working with, 207 chart format, determining what to use, 205 chart label properties, 229 Chart menu commands, 237 chart properties, changing, 227 Chart section applying sorts in, 216
356
Index B
hiding, 244 Column Titles command, 78 column totals, 140 columns, 32 to 129, 138 to 141, 244 to 245, 253 combination charts, 212, 232 comma-delimited files, 48, 55 Command lines, 43 commands Chart menu, 237 Edit menu, 75 File menu, 75 Format menu, 78 formatting, 129 Pivot menu, 197, 311 Report menu, 264 Results menu, 132 Table menu, 141 Tools menu, 93 View menu, 76 commands, Help menu, xv comparing related values, 213 complex sorting in OLAPQuery section, 342 in Query, Results, and Table sections, 341 components, report, 243 compressing documents, 46 computed fields, 248 to 249 computed items adding, 141, 237, 264, 289 Chart section, 215 compared to data functions, 289 data types and specifications, 285 examples, 304 in Interactive Reporting sections, 284 in OLAP queries, 153 in Query section, 285 in Results and report sections, 286 Report section, 255 Table section, 137 computing new data, 284 Concat function, 297 concatenating report element syntax, 242 Connection commands, 93 connection files, 24 Connections Manager command, 93 Console Window command, 76
consulting services, xvii CONTAINS, 273 Content pane, 44 contents, document, 23 converting detail reports, 262 to 264 Copy command, 75 correlated subqueries, 104 Cos function, 295 Cosh function, 295 Count function, 139, 177, 214, 256 Count function, 295 to 296 CountDistinct function, 296 CountNonNull function, 296 CountNull function, 296 creating charts, 205 custom reports, 242 pivot tables, 172 pivot tables from charts, 217 smart reports, 261 three-dimensional bar charts, 209 creating documents, 73 CSV files, 48, 55 Cume function definition, 296 cumulative filters, 176 cumulative totals, adding, 176 custom functions, 139 custom menu items, 92 Custom SQL command, 77 custom totals, inserting, 126, 139 custom values, 272 Customize command, 94 Customize Filter command, 122 customizing chart patterns, colors, and labels, 232 customizing chart properties and labels, 227 customizing filter options, 277 Cut command, 75
D
data calculating, 33 charting, 36 exporting, 55 filtering, 33 hiding, 36
Index D
357
importing, 48 pivoting, 34 refining in OLAPQuery, 151 Data Function command, 197, 237, 264 data functions compared to computed items, 289 in charts, 214 in custom reports, 256 in OLAP queries, 165 in pivot tables, 177 in queries, 113 Data Functions command, 122, 169 Data Layout Chart section, 205 Pivot section, 173 Table section, 134 data layout, 43 data models, 25 data source connections, 24 data sources, working with, 48 data types, 124 data types and specifications , 285 data, computing, 284 data, pivoting, 173 database definition, 23 displaying remarks, 113 viewing tables, 31 Date & Time field, 249 Date & Time Now field, 249 Date command, 87 Date data type, 285 Date field, 249 Date Group command, Add, 141 date handling, 89 Date Now field, 249 dates, breakout columns, 128, 139 day of week, returning, 303 DayOfMonth function, 294 Decode function, 294 default formats, 86 default_number_formats, 59 Delete Section command, 76 deleting columns, 141 deleting sections, 85 descending sorts, 141
design guides, 251 Design Guides command, 264 Detail reports, converting, 262 dimensions, definition, 124 display differences, 262 display options Essbase, 147 displaying axis grid lines, 220 displaying rulers, 251 document sections. See sections. documents compressing, 46 contents of, 23 conventions used, xvi exporting as Web pages, 70 feedback, xviii password protecting, 46 saving, 45 structure of, xiv documents, accessing Hyperion Download Center, xv Hyperion Solutions Web site, xv Information Map, xv online help, xv Download To Results command, 169 Drill Anywhere command, 237 drill down, 35, 152 Drill Down command, 169, 197 drill up, 152 Drill Up command, 169, 197, 237 drilling into charts, 218 drilling through, multi-dimensional to relational, 166 Duplicate Section command, 76, 83 duplicate values, suppressing, 244
E
editing footers, 84 editing headers, 84 education services, xvii elements selecting pivot, 173 working with chart, 207 empty rows, suppressing, 148 ENDS WITH, 273 EQUAL, 273 Essbase
358
Index E
applying measure filters, 159 attribute dimensions, 145 command language, 26 display options, 147 query language, 26 substitution variables, 161 Estimate Query Size command, 122 Excel files, 55 Exp function, 295 export documents as Web pages, 69 HTML Wizard, 71 properites, 50 to 51 properties, 78 query logs, 72 sections, 55 SQL, 72 Export commands, 75 Export Properties command, 78 Expression line, 241 expression syntax, 241
measure applying, 159 variable, 160 member variable, 159 removing, 136 tables, 135 variable, 159 in OLAP Query, 159 slicer, 160 filters, applying in OLAPQuery, 158 filters, cumulative, 176 focus on items, 218, 258 Focus On Items command, 197, 237, 264 Font command, 78 font styles, changing, 261 fonts, changing, 261 fonts,default, 86 footers, 84 footers, page in custom reports, 246 Format menu commands, 78 formats default fonts, 86 number, 87 specifying, 86 formatting commands, 129 formatting day of week data, 303 formatting report items, 261 functions data, 165 in sorts, 217, 343 MDX, 155 weighted, 180
F
facts, 172 facts, definition, 124 features, sort line, 216 field definitions, number, 87 fields, 248 file locations, 89 File menu commands, 75 File Name field, 249 files, exporting, 55 Filter command, 132, 141 filter dialog box, 270 filter line, 269 filter line syntax, 270 filter options, customizing, 277 filter, operators, 273 filtering data in a table, 135 filtering queries, 274 filtering results, 275 filters applying in OLAPQuery, 158 member selection, 158 cumulative, 176
G
Go To Section command, 76 Grand Total command, 132, 142 grand total data functions, 139 grand totals, inserting, 126, 139 graphic elements, 247 GREATER OR EQUAL, 273 GREATER THAN, 273 Grid command, 264 grid lines, 201 Grid Lines command, 78
Index F
359
grids, 251 group fact syntax, 242 group headers, report, 245 Group Items command, 197, 237 group label syntax, 242 grouping columns, 141 guides, design, 251
H
headers, 84 page, in custom reports, 246 report group, 245 Headers and Footers command, 265 Help menu commands, xv Hide Column command, 132, 142, 237, 264 hide items, 219, 259 Hide Items command, 197, 237, 264 Hide Request Item command, 76 Hide Section command, 76 hiding and focusing on charted data, 218 hiding and focusing on reported data, 258 hiding column names, 244 hiding column totals, 244 hiding Request items, 100 hiding sections, 82 horizontal lines, 248 HTML export wizard, 71 restrictions and limitations, 71 HTML file formats, 56 comparison of, 56 Hyperion Consulting Services, xvii Hyperion Download Center accessing documents, xv Hyperion Education Services, xvii Hyperion product information, xvii Hyperion support, xvii Hyperion Technical Support, xviii
INI file, 93 Initcap function, 297 Insert Field command, 264 Insert Graphic command, 264 Insert menu commands, 77 Insert Predefined Field command, 264 Insert Table command, 264 inserting additional tables in a custom report, 245 limit values, 250 page breaks, 247 page headers and footers, 246 report headers and footers, 246 text, 220 text in charts, 220 inserting sections, 77 Instr function, 297 Integer command, 87 Integer data type, 285 Interactive Reporting analysis and reporting, 26 quitting, 73 starting, 30 Interactive Reporting document (.bqy), 73 IS NULL, 273 items, sort, 216
J
JavaScript expressions, 61 Justify commands, 78
K
Keep Together command, 261 Keep With Next command, 261
L
label properties chart, 229 charts, 229 label reference, in sorts, 216, 342 labels, nested, 174 Las Saved field, 249 Last Printed field, 249 LastDay function, 294
I
import data files, 48 SQL, 49 Import Data File commands, 75 Increase function, 177
360
Index H
layout aids, 241 legacy chart colors, 229, 234 legend, 201 legends, positioning and resizing, 220 Length function, 297 LESS OR EQUAL, 273 LESS THAN, 273 level rules, OLAPQuery member and, 150 LIKE, 273 limit values, in reports, 250 line charts, 212 lines, 248 local filters, Results section, 269 Local Results limitations, 117 processing order, 117 locally saved BQYs, 94 Locked command, 248 logical operators, 273 Lower function, 297 Ltrim function, 297
Pivot, 197, 311 Report, 264 Results, 132 Table, 141 Tools, 93 menus and menu items, customizing, 92 meta topics, 25 metadata, definition, 23 methods for returning the day of the week, 303 Microsoft Office Excel, 58 Min function, 295 Minimum function, 139, 177, 214, 256 Mod function, 295 Mode function, 296 Modify Column command, 132, 141 Modify command, 197 Modify Computed Item command, 237 modifying pivot tables, 173 Month (for Add Date Groups) command, 87 MonthsBetween function, 294 moving between sections, 83 moving pivot table elements, 174 MovingMax, 332 multicolumned reports, 253 Multidimensional Access Language (MaxL), 26 multidimensional charts, 208 multidimensional databases components, 144 definition, 23 querying, 143 supported, 23 Multidimensional Expression Language (MDX), 26 Multidimensional Query Language (MDSQL), 26 multiple data sources, in reports, 259
M
Main menu, 42 manipulating chart data, 213 manipulating table data, 135 margins, in Report section, 252 master data models, 25 Max function, 295 Maximum function, 139, 177, 214, 256 MaxL (Multidimensional Access Language), 26 MDSQL (Multidimensional Query Language), 26 MDX (Multidimensional Expression Language), 26 MDX functions, 155 measure filters, applying, 159 measure variable filters, 160 measures, 152 Median function, 296 member and level rules, OLAPQuery, 150 member, OLAP, 351 members, drilling down, 152 menu commands Chart, 237 Edit, 75 File, 75 Format, 78
N
nested labels, 174 nested sorts, 341 Next function, 296 NextDay function, 294 NM function, 294 Non-Null Average function, 178, 214, 256 Non-Null Count function, 178, 214, 256 NOT (with operator), 273 NOT EQUAL, 273 Null command, 87
Index M
361
Null Count function, 178, 214, 256 Number command, 78 number field definitions , 87 number formats, changing, 261 number formats, default, 87 Number of Pages field, 249
analyzing data, 206 rotating, 207 pie slices, positioning, 207 Pivot, 172 Pivot Data Layout, 173 pivot elements, selecting, 173 Pivot menu commands , 197, 311 Pivot Options, 289 pivot tables calculating totals and subtotals, 175 charting, 173 how to use, 173 modifying, 173 selecting elements, 173 subtotals, 175 to 176 working with pivot items, 173 pivoting data, 173 planes, 201 plot area, 201 positioning pie slices, 207 Power function, 295 primary sort, 341 Print command, 73, 75 Print Preview command, 72, 75 Prior function, 296 process in OLAPQuery, 157 in Query, 100 Process Query command, 93 Process Results To Table command, 122 program options, selecting, 88 Properties command, 77, 237 properties, chart label, 229 properties, export, 50 to 51, 78 publish, 131
O
object names, 248 ODBC, stored procedures and, 118 OLAP queries adding totals to, 165 building, 145 OLAP, member, 351 OLAPQuery items, formatting, 166 OLAPQuery member and level rules, 150 OLAPQuery section, 26 accessing offline, 157 diagram, 144 showing as a chart, 165 working offline, 157 OLE DB for OLAP query language, 26 operators logical, 273 options program, 88 Options command, 94 OR, 269 Outliners, 43 ovals, 248
P
Packed Real data type, 285 page breaks, inserting, 77, 247 Page Margins command, 264 Page Number field, 249 Page Setup command, 72, 75 Page X of Y field, 249 pages, setting up in reports, 39 password protect document, 46 Paste command, 75 Path Name field, 249 Percentile function, 296 Picture command, 264 pictures, 248 pie charts
Q
queries adding topics to, 31 appending, 116 building OLAP, 145 cancelling, 102 estimating size, 112 example, 31 multiple, 98 processing, 100 to 101, 157
362
Index O
sizing, 112 troubleshooting, 112 Query Limit field, 248 Query Log command, 76 query logs, exporting, 72 Query Options command, 122 Query Processing Order, 101 query properties, 119 Query section data functions , 114 diagram, 98 types of, 26 Query SQL field, 249 query, definition, 25, 113
Report Name field, 249 report pages, 251 Report section computed fields, 249 computed items, 255 creating smart reports, 261 data functions, 256 diagram, 240 elements, 240 Expression syntax, 241 fields , 248 formatting items, 261 graphic elements , 248 limit values, 250 toolbar, 241 using multiple data sources, 259 Report Setup command, 265 reporting, 26 reports adding computed items, 255 creating, 39 data functions, 256 designing, 38 inserting page breaks, 247 multicolumned, 253 setting up, 39 smart, 261 Request items, hiding, 100 Restore Name command, 197, 237 Result Limit field, 248 results automatically adding columns, 128 enhancing, 125 exporting, 131 filtering, 125 save options, 131 saving, 46, 129 viewing, 32 working with, 123, 129 Results menu commands, 132 Results section automatically creating, 158 data functions, 126 diagram, 124 exporting, 55
R
Rank function scalar, 296 RankAsc function, 296 Real command, 87 Real data type, 285 rectangles, 248 Redo command, 75 reference items, in sorts, 216, 342 Refresh Data command, 197 relational databases definition, 23 querying, 97 remarks, displaying, 113 Remove command, 132, 141 Remove Selected Items command, 197, 237, 264 Remove Total command, 169 removing columns, 244 removing Request items, 99 removing Request line items, 99 Rename Section command, 76 renaming sections, 83 reordering columns, 245 reordering Request items, 99 reordering Request line items, 99 Replace function, 297 report components, 243 report element syntax, concatenating, 242 report expression syntax , 242 report group headers, 245 Report menu commands, 264
Index R
363
Retrieve Dimensions command, 169 returning day of week, 303 ribbon charts, 211 rotating and elevating charts, 223 rotating pie charts, 207 Round function, 295 round rectangles, 248 Row command, 78 Row Numbers command, 78 rows, selecting, 129, 141 Rtrim function, 297 Rulers command, 264
bar chart properties, 231 chart label axis properties, 229 chart value axis properties, 230 general chart properties, 227 setting compound filters, 276 setting simple filters, 273 setting up page columns, 253 reports, 252 setting variable filters, 277 Show All Items command, 197, 237, 264 Show As Chart command, 169 Show Hidden Items command, 197, 237, 264 Show Remarks command, 122 show values, 271 showing column names, 244 showing column totals, 244 showing pie percentages, 207 showing positive and negative values, 207 Sign function, 295 simple sorts, 340 Sin function, 295 Sinh function, 295 slice, 201 slicers setting, 151 variable filters, 160 smart reports, 261 smart reports, creating, 39 Sort Ascending command, 132, 141, 237, 264 Sort command, 197, 264 Sort Descending command, 132, 141 sort items, 216, 342 sort line features, 216, 342 sort lines, 340 sort order, 341 sorting chart items, 216 charts, 175 pivot tables, 175 report items, 254 reports, 254 tables, 136 sorting data, 340 sorting, in OLAPQuery section, 342 sorting, in Query, Results, and Table sections, 341
S
Save As command, 75 Save command, 75 Save Connection command, 93 Save Options commands, 75 saving documents, 45 scalar functions, 294 examples, 307 scripts, running from menu items, 92 Section Boundaries command, 264 Section pane, 43 Section title bar, 43 Section Title Bar command, 76 Section/Catalog command, 76 sections adding, 82 deleting, 85 duplicating, 82 to 83 exporting, 55 hiding, 82 inserting, 77 moving between, 83 renaming, 83 viewing, 82 Select A Formatting Locale command, 87 Select All command, 76 selecting chart elements, 219 selecting columns, 244 selecting columns and rows, 141 selecting pivot table elements, 174 server filters in the Query section, 268 server versus local filter processing, 268 setting
364
Index S
sorts, nested, 341 specifying page margins, 252 page size, 252 Spotlighter command, 78 SQL definition, 25 exporting, 72 importing, 49 SQL files, 72 Sqrt function, 295 stacked bar charts, 210 staging data in tables, 134 standard query languages, 25 Status bar, 44 Status Bar command, 76 StdDev function, 297 StdDevp function, 297 stored procedures, 118 opening, 118 processing, 118 Stored Procedures command, 122 String data type, 285 Structured Query Language (SQL), 25 Style commands, 78 subqueries, building, 103 Substr function, 297 subtotals, 175 subtotals, calculating, 35 Sum function, 139, 177, 214, 256 Sum function, 296, 316 Suppress Duplicates command, 78 suppressing duplicate values, 244 surface values, 286, 289 surface values, in data functions, 179 syntax concatenating, 242 expression, 241 syntax, concatenating, 242 Sysdate function, 294
table fact syntax, 242 Table menu commands, 141 Table section computed items, 137 data functions, 139 diagram, 134 tables adding computed items, 137 filters, 135 in bqtbls5.ini file, 112 modifying pivot, 173 pivot, 173, 175 to 176 working with, 140 tables as a data staging area, 134 Tan function, 295 Tanh function, 295 technical support, xviii Teradata Version 3 OLAP functions, 298 text in charts, inserting, 220 text labels, 248 Text Wrap command, 78 text, formatting, 77 text, wrapping, 244 three-dimensional bar charts, 209 Time command, 87 Time datatype, 285 Time field, 249 Time Now field, 249 Timestamp command, 87 TimeStamp data type, 285 ToCha function, 294 ToDate function, 294 ToMonth function, 294 toolbar, in the Report section, 241 toolbars, 42 Toolbars command, 76 Tools menu commands, 93 topics, adding to query, 31 ToQtr function, 295 Total commands, 141 to 142 totals adding to OLAPQuery, 165 break, 127, 140 calculating, 35 calculating pivot totals, 175 cumulative, 176 to 177
T
tab-delimited files, 48, 55 table column formatting options, 244 Table Data Layout, 134 table dimension syntax, 242
Index T
365
inserting break totals, 140 inserting column totals, 140 inserting in Results section, 126 inserting in Tables section break, 139 custom, 139 grand, 139 surface, 177 surface, 177 ToYear function, 295 Translate function, 297 Trend Functions, 324 True Computed Item Totals, 178 Trunc function, 295 two-dimensional bar charts, 208 TXT files, 48, 55
X
XLS files, 55
Z
Zoom command, 76
U
underlying values, 286, 289 Undo command, 75 Ungroup Items command, 197, 237 Unhide Column command, 132, 142, 237, 264 Unhide Request Item command, 77 Unhide Section command, 76 Upper function, 297 using functions, 293 using surface values, 289
V
value reference, in sorts, 216, 342 values, 201, 213, 244 Var filter indicator, 269 Var function, 297 Var limit indicator, 269 Variable Filter command, 122 variable filters, in OLAPQuery, 159 Varp function, 297 VBA functions, 67 vertical lines, 248 View Job List command, 94 Visible command, 248
W
Web browser restrictions and limitations, 71 weighted functions, 180
366
Index U
Index Z
367